Home

ZETRON Model 827 MPT1327 Trunking Controller - F1DFF

1. 3 4 Slotted Aloha Protocols i aee En dua E mat do 3 5 Registration and Security Code 3 5 TrathicChantie nde Se cat 3 5 CUA Ee NL 3 7 CROSS BUSY OPERATION ex enue ead 3 8 TRAFFIC CHANNEL OPERATION 3 8 Speech and Telephone Interconnect 3 8 Include aedetede nel bre 3 9 Nonstandard Data CallSz e 3 10 FLEETS UNITS AND GROUNPS bcd EN 3 10 CALE TYPES 3 11 ROS Request Simple Cals 3 11 ROS Request Include Calls ndi tet eroi de Ege oet pee eve es 3 11 ROE Request Emergency 3 12 Request Status Transaction SDMI eee 3 12 Request to Transmit Short Data 3 12 ROT Request Call Diversions iita Deo cades etae IN EUR SE ER VG MUS 3 12 Abort 3 13 INTERCONNECT OPTION ortaci aei t aes e t 3 13 Line ype 3 13 Radio Unit to PSTN Calls cues ctt p ot eee Iia eiit Dore duse ME Ree 3 13 3 14 Lea
2. C 3 4 Wire E amp M D r nks C 3 INSTALLATION OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE INTERFACE C 3 TELEPHONE INTERFACE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS C 4 End to End or 2 Wire E amp M Trunks eese C 4 C 5 I INTRODUCTION ee citi tieu rte Rete FEATURES 1 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on your purchase of the Model 827 MPT1327 Trunking Controller The Model 827 is a repeater control unit that provides system infrastructure for an MPT1327 Trunked Radio System The MPT1327 trunked mobile radio standard is recognized internationally for public and private radio systems and a range of radio manufacturers offer hand portable and mobile radios that operate on this standard A Model 827 based system provides the operational efficiency and value added services of MPT1327 trunking Each repeater in the trunked radio system requires a Model 827 and multiple repeaters and multiple Model 827 units are combined for the MPT1327 trunked system Features such as priority calls group calls status messaging and fleet management are supported on up to 24 channels per site Extensive telephone interconnect capabilities are also available Subscriber management and call logging features are provided with remote access for system maintenance FEATURES e Trunking Controller meeting MPT1327 1343 international trunking standard
3. n 6 65 Link to Amothber Dial Plaficz 6 65 ROADS S soo ec tM tse UT I 6 66 Roam COS choi te ves ves Ceo rue TUVO 6 67 Seu uper ct AMO oL Moe dmt tup eot 6 67 Dial etos leitet eiie ttes o end 6 67 BEL 6 67 Link to another Roaming 8 6 68 TONE AND VOICE PROMPT eene 6 68 Tone Prompt GombpatiBIIs eise e oi ute MN ue oh ta Rad 6 70 Voice a ata aste x opt 6 70 Voice Prompt Programming 6 71 Voice Programming 6 72 Endins tue a ea deus 6 72 Fone 6 74 Voice Prompts 6 74 6 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING DATABASE OVERVIEW The M827BASE database consists of several database files which are used to program the Model 827 s Below is a brief description of each of these files which correspond to a M827BASE submenu selection from the Site COS and Units submenus e The Site Config defines all of the general purpose site specific information that applies to all Model 827s at a particular site This contains information such as how to communicate with a site for programming monitoring purposes A site must be defined in this database se
4. 6 58 Programmi Order A ae ce ea C DIE 6 58 Tables citet eoe E 6 58 Least Cost Route Table eoe eo eod en Ode D terat Mq 6 59 Dial PATS ed eh tle bs 6 59 OQ tdial Table 6 59 Program Nae ae 6 62 Commands s pr 6 62 Parametets ita sun ae inet tetuer s tue iets tid rd 6 62 beast Cost Roule able 6 63 Ut ute nis 6 63 ECR NaMe Pr 6 64 Trunk Grop Mete p 6 64 OutDral Prostam 6 64 DOCE M e CE TEE 6 64 Plan NUES ete iuc Su pea PUT ccu UE ion 6 65 Plan NAI iade ceteri mbi oon tbe Si IRI Es soci tesi uuo Red 6 65 Digit PIA asso Em a citius 6 65 Route NUIDDeIr eum A asia 6 65 Next Page usse 6 65 Link to Another Dial Plains tesis 6 65 cunei Seats 6 66 Roam COS Number secereli 6 67 Roam COS NATI aas estet MEE 6 67 scans aves tet esuada dui E c 6 67 ME 6 67 DUE OS 6 67 Link to another Roaming 6 68 TONE AND VOICE PROMPT PROGRAMMIING esee 6 68 Tone
5. 01010111110 24 11110111110 27 8 15 0 1 1 1 0 2 00 30 31 Flash Memory Enable mE Flash Memory Enabled ERE h Flash Memory Disabled Telephone Modem Type T V 22bis V 22 V 21 1 212 7 103 The label down position on the physical switches corresponds to a value of 0 Section 4 Installation Table 4 5 Model 827 Audio Processing Jumper Selection Received Audio From Base Station Receiver Audio Processing JP10 Speech is still pre emphasized and data is flat connection is made A A directly after discriminator Speech is flat and data is de emphasized connection is made following de emphasis Transmit Audio to Base Station Combined Speech and Data Input Transmitter Audio Processing JP11 Speech and data will be pre emphasized by transmitter Speech and data will be unprocessed connection is made close to A B C modulator Transmit Audio to Base Station Separate Speech and Data Inputs Transmitter Audio Processing lues JP11 Speech will be pre emphasized and data unprocessed Speech and data will be unprocessed Speech will be unprocessed and data pre emphasized SUE Speech and data will be pre emphasized Assumes mobiles are operating with pre empha
6. 6 6 Number of Digits to Expect After Lead esses 6 6 Use Advanced Dial PIan oss 6 7 Call Limit and Aloha Frame Schedule 6 7 DE 6 7 Toa CODD aene 6 7 Speech and PSTN Columns 6 8 Prompts e 6 8 Networking Paramielets soo ves te petu tube fori due 6 8 Queue Intersite Calls on 6 9 Allow Secondary 4 6 9 Secondary Registration Timeout eene 6 9 Intersite Queue Timeout essere 6 9 Edit Network Route uuu pedit peer 6 9 Nip PC 6 9 Serial Number 3222 2 dc cide 6 9 Seral Baud Rate estivo 6 10 6 10 Queue ia bid are 6 10 Diversion Parameters 6 10 limpio 6 11 Set Status Messages To Toggle Divert on No Answer 6 11 Set Status Messages To Toggle Divert on 6 11 Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position On 6 11 Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position 6 11 MPT1327 CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING eee 6 12 Syst m 6 12 System Identity 6 12 Netwo
7. 3 8 Speech and Telephone Interconnect 3 8 Incl de SCIAT R 3 9 Nonstandard Data 3 10 FLEETS UNITS AND GROURS a bv DAR 3 10 CALL TYPES cR 3 11 RQS Request Simple Calls 3 11 ROS Request Include Calls a o ee Sew 3 11 RQE Request Emergency all oe ad eel seid 3 12 Request Status Transaction SDMI eere 3 12 Request to Transmit Short Data Message eene 3 12 ROT Request Call DIVerSIOINA 2 dosi aeuo o NE a Ue UR Sae aet ue 3 12 ROX Abort Transactions uc uito quod 3 13 INTERCONNECT OPTION s yaa e 3 13 ESTAS TYPES Men Up E EE 3 13 Radio PS TN C 3 13 Toll ee eir eae eee e si 3 14 Contents continued Least GOs ROUN 3 14 Advanced Dial Plan iie ee Ra uerit e 3 15 Radio Unit to PABX trad idence 3 15 PSEIN PABX to Radio ede 3 16 PSTN PABX Overdial Speech Calls esses 3 17 PSTN PABX Direct Dial Calls nad etre td buic 3 17 M lti Site Operation re a 3 18 Roaming and e Ia Eee o 3 19 Operattoti eus PAD INTUS
8. Repeater Jammed reset time 02 Emerg Calls demand resources Y Emerg call time limit 00 00 Report Alarms to Radio Y Repeat alarm 001 Interval 010 HELP C DIVERSION Select the radio unit whose ident will Unit Name GP 1200 be used to toggle on and off a particular unit s divert on no answer Set Status Messages or busy setting To Toggle Divert on No Answer 27 To Toggle Divert on Busy 28 Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position On 29 For Toggle Switch Position Off 30 Figure 6 5 Site Configuration Diversion Parameters 6 10 Section 6 System Programming Unit Name A unit must be selected from those already defined to be the target unit for sending special status messages to toggle the divert on no answer or busy toggle switches for the calling unit s diversion Set Status Messages To Toggle Divert on No Answer When the control channel receives a request to send this status message to the target unit defined above it will toggle the divert on No Answer toggle switch for the calling unit s currently existing diversion Set Status Messages To Toggle Divert on Busy When the control channel receives a request to send this status message to the target unit defined above it will toggle the divert on Busy toggle switch for the calling unit s currently existing diversion Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position On When the control channel toggles either the divert on no
9. A k 15 15 SEH I CE SCH I SCH 15 45 AH A oC A CO I 16 00 AH EH oC 16 15 RR GR RR 16 30 16 45 kk kk kk kk 17 00 17 15 17 30 17 45 18 00 18 15 18 30 18 45 19 00 19 15 19 30 19 45 20 00 20 15 20 30 20 45 21 00 21 15 21 30 21 45 22 00 22 15 22 30 22 45 23 00 23 15 23 30 23 45 Busy hour from 13 00 to 14 00 Busy hour percent used 79 3296 Number of busy hour calls 160 Mean duration of busy hour calls 17 sec s Number of Units 3 Number of Disabled Units 0 Peak to mean ratio 5 71 STATISTICS RETRIEVAL COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY B 16 Appendix C CANADIAN TELEPHONE INTERFACE OPTION C 1 PSTNACONNBCIALIONS C 1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE INSTALLATION cree C 2 End to End u a i i a i i C 2 2 Wire E amp M Trunks cede eee eee eee te eee ee ee eae eese eve e ee etna C 3 4 Wire B amp M Trunks eite ended tento ed Tea renes C 3 INSTALLATION OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE INTERFACE C 3 TELEPHONE INTERFACE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS C 4 End to End or 2 Wire E amp M 4 4 Wire Trunks Appendix C CANADIAN TE
10. E reneo conan peron orni Address Line 1 First Line of Address County Province Additional county state or province information State Country Country mes me Fe me fomen Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 7 User File Fields for Fleet Record Continued Field Name Type Length Description Rate Code Char 5 Rate code assigned to this fleet only used if no rate code has been assigned to the group or individual Apply Discount Char 1 Indicates if a discount should be applied to this account N No discount Y Apply percentage in next field S Use standard discount schedule Percent Discount Num 4 2 Amount of discount to give this fleet Only use if Apply Discount field Y Deposit amount paid by this customer Calls on Invoice Summary Individual E Exc Free Time N No Billing Create Date Date this record was created MM DD YY eme me _ 9 Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 8 shows the field contents and format for UNIT Records in the User File Table A 8 User File Fields for Unit Record Rate Code Char 5 Rate code assigned to this fleet only used if no rate code has been assigned to the group or individual Apply Discount Char 1 Indicates if a discount should be applied to this account N No discount Y Apply percentage in next field S Use standard discount schedule Record T
11. 6 38 Start Supervision Seek TIme eo iati iecur suadeo 6 38 Delay Before Dialout ehe e eost acera Yo 6 39 Base DID Adder and Range of DID 6 39 Auto Balance Hybrids hose vada e 6 39 Enable Voice Prompts ettet Eee eher e HERR A 6 40 doc Calg C 6 40 Incoming Call desierit tort acsi at re 6 40 Enable Disconnect isa eo iet e ER eee pela oe 6 41 ose Don eek diluted A 6 41 Line 6 41 Trunk Group c S 6 41 GENERAL CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING em 6 41 Allowance I 6 42 Use Fixed all DII Ea dh tart qat 6 42 Data Call Limits Fines d 6 43 Full Off Air 6 43 ING AMIS WEE ease ode om 6 43 PSI AW Gl fee P 6 43 PDS do HIE 6 43 Plow IMS E 6 43 Edit Call tuf ten is des dos e cedar 6 43 Same BCS t Moo Wd abe 6 44 Inter Fleet T 6 45 SENI Parameters OD eR Ul ON
12. progress tone Second dial tone detected Call limit time out 7 Auto balance 18 Status transaction complete Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 4 Error Codes for Status Field Code Description Code Description 1 Battery loss detected while still 17 Called fleet invalid ringing out to mobile 2 DTMF detected from telco 18 Calling fleet invalid while still ringing out to mobile Feed digits not received Priority too low 5 Called unit not allowed interconnect Called unit not found 8 Called unit busy Called unit user did not answer 26 No matching least cost route found Called unit did not reply to 27 Outbound call toll restrict general availability check System busy no resources 28 No response from calling unit for available address to dial Unit failed registration 29 No response from calling unit for SDM2 HEAD message Unit failed security check 30 Called Unit SDM2 storage full offhook or dialing failure 31 Called Unit not equipped for SDM2 calls 32 Invalid Inbound Diversion A 5 Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 5 shows the call detail fields that apply only to multisite record types 2 90Hex Table A 5 Call Detail Fields for Multisite Records Originating Site Originating site number for multisite calls Destination Site Num 3 Destination site number for multisite calls blank for multisite group calls Home Site Home site number of calling mobile for mob
13. 15 30 15 45 16 00 2 16 15 16 30 16 45 17 00 17 15 17 30 17 45 18 00 18 15 18 30 18 45 19 00 19 15 19 30 19 45 20 00 20 15 20 30 20 45 21 00 21 15 21 30 21 45 22 00 22 15 22 30 22 45 23 00 23 15 23 30 23 45 LLL Busy hour from 12 00 to 13 00 Busy hour percent used 99 06 Number of busy hour calls 216 Mean duration of busy hour calls 16 sec s Number of Units 3 Number of Disabled Units 0 Peak to mean ratio 5 80 B 14 Appendix B Statistics Files Yesterday s Traffic Loading Site 001 Hours 00 00 11 45 PC Time 05 30 00 15 06 42 Time 146 4096 80 00 00 00 15 00 30 00 45 01 00 01 15 01 30 01 45 02 00 02 15 02 30 02 45 03 00 03 15 03 30 03 45 04 00 04 15 04 30 04 45 05 00 05 15 05 30 05 45 06 00 06 15 06 30 06 45 07 00 07 15 07 30 07 45 08 00 08 15 08 30 08 45 09 00 09 15 09 30 09 45 15 Appendix B Statistics Files Yesterday s Traffic Loading Site 001 Hours 12 00 23 45 PC Time 05 30 00 15 06 42 Time 146 40 80 14 45 HH aH I SCI SC A 15 00
14. 3 19 Individual Calls edet 3 20 Group Calls ME 3 24 Emergency Calls Demanding Resources in a Multi Site enn No id 3 25 Multi Site Radio to PSTN PABX 3 25 Multi Site Diversions Divert on Busy and No Answer 3 25 M e e 3 26 Operating With Lost LIKES EO EE 3 26 Voice and Ton desired tas PUN 3 26 CALE DE TAM REG OR DS ode eee qtue eU 3 27 ALARM DETECTION AND REPORTING 3 28 Ecc PP ies 3 29 4 INSTALLATION 4 1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL WARNINGS eee 4 52 tameu ae itecto e p ere UR 4 1 RO VAR S Quse a iet S nt 4 Figures and Tables Used during 4 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE en a pure EPA QUERN 4 15 Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 sene 4 15 Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option 950 0002 4 19 Model 827 UK Telephone Interface Option 950 9640 4 19 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4 21 Badio
15. 1 Enter the desired program SITE 001 number here 1 32 OUTDIAL PROGRAM Program Number 2 Enter a descriptive name Program Name 1 Command Parameters 3 The Command field is filled by M827BASE press and a pop up window appears with a list of commands use and keys to select command then press to insert that command 4 Enter applicable parameters for each command if used Spaces separate variable fields NO hyphens accepted NO spaces in DIAL strings 5 Maximum 12 lines per 4 Outdial Program Figure 6 36 Outdial Program Window CO PO S paga NFO Program Name Enter a Program Name see Figure 6 36 Note 2 which describes the dialing function to be performed It is helpful to include standard telephone labels such as LOCAL DTMF and PBX in the program name for identification purposes Please note that this name only exists in the original M827BASE files Commands To enter a Command in the program select a command field see Figure 6 36 Note 3 using the T and 4 keys and press ENTER This will activate a pop up window Use the T and 4 keys to select the desired command and press ENTER The command must be END To delete or replace a Command already entered select the command using the T and 4 keys and press ENTER to access the pop up window Use the T and J keys to select a replacement and press ENTER or press DELETE
16. 11 No Reply or Not Registered the unit being called did not respond to the availability check on the control channel or is not registered 12 Confirmation not used 13 Conversation Timeout the call limit timer for this call has timed out 14 System Busy no traffic channel or queue space is available for this call 15 Disconnecting the call is being disconnected 16 Alarm an alarm condition has been detected Under the Prompts window in the Site Configuration programming each of the above prompts can be disabled or the tone or voice prompt can be selected Each voice prompt can then be allocated the desired recording time A total of 64 seconds are available for voice prompts In cases in which the voice prompt has been selected but none has been recorded the tone will be played For information on how to record the voice prompts see Tone and Voice Prompts in Section 5 CALL DETAIL RECORDS Each Model 827 contains storage for between 3656 and 7313 call records depending on the type of records stored If the buffer storage area in one unit becomes full that unit will look for storage available in another unit at the site Call records can be stored for the following types of transactions registration status short data messages mobile to mobile mobile to landline landline to mobile and diverted landline to mobile The number of records stored can be controlled through the site programming by enabling or disabling t
17. 6 46 Call Diversion Parameters uiu e RARE RIS 6 47 FLBEBETS PROGRANINMIENGI 6 47 Index NUTHDGE 6 48 Fleet NUM DER eode eae 6 48 Ses codo et reds 6 48 Number Prefix sse ica er ton 6 48 creer eee 6 49 Fleet Group NUIDGE pe 6 49 Last Group p ptt 6 49 Fleet Individual uin n eue ty neci aee Piet 6 49 Last Individual NODE ee e HI UAR DA 6 49 Fleet Customer Information for Billing eene 6 49 UNITS PROGRANINVIINGL insciis erae ei trs oen Veste iat He eu cus 6 50 Membetof EIeet odeur e e dit uisi Ete mM eects 6 51 Umit INGER 6 51 PIDE e eon 6 51 Direct Dial Number 6 52 General CASS a 6 52 GROUPS PROGRAMM ING inel tute Er REDE ERI 6 52 Member of setis 6 53 Group NUMDET 6 53 Enable bate BB osi 6 53 Jom Existis e esa tins teased 6 53 Allow Incoming fr
18. Radio transceiver MPT1327 compatible 2 IBM compatible PC 386 or higher with RS 232 serial port 3 Model 827 Database Manager software installed on PC see Section 5 4 True RMS multimeter 5 Service monitor 6 Oscilloscope 7 RS 232 cable D subminiature 9 pin male connector for Model 827 4 Section 4 Installation Figures and Tables Used during Setup Refer to the following figures and tables while setting up your Model 827 Figure 4 1 on page 4 3 provides a diagram of a typical Model 827 to transmitter receiver connection Figure 4 2 on page 4 4 shows the Model 827 repeater cable connector pin numbers and descriptions Figure 4 3 on page 4 4 shows the Model 827 telephone cable connector pin numbers and descriptions Figure 4 4 on page 4 5 shows the Model 827 system configuration switches and descriptions Figure 4 5 on page 4 6 shows the Model 827 Main board component layout Figure 4 6 on page 4 7 shows the Model 827 Processor board component layout Figure 4 7 on page 4 8 shows the Model 827 Telephone Interface board component layout Figure 4 8 on page 4 9 shows the Model 827 UK 4 Wire Telephone Cable installation Figure 4 9 on page 4 10 shows the Model 827 Audio Processing Jumpers Figure 4 10 on page 4 11 shows the installation of the Telephone Option 950 9640 Table 4 1 on page 4 9 shows the jumper settings for the Model 827 Main Board 702 9745 Table 4 2 on page 4 13 shows the jumper settings for the
19. Compatible with MPT1352 1327 compliant radios e Modular design and expansion capability ensure a cost effective solution for smaller systems e Site capacity of 24 radio channels 5000 subscribers 2000 group identities and 500 fleets e Supports extensive range of MPT 1327 functions Fixed cyclic dedicated or non dedicated control channel Individual and group speech calls both simple and inter prefix Non prescribed data Normal priority and emergency calls Status calls Include calls Short data messages Calls telephone to radio or radio to telephone Call diversion self initiated and third party Call diversion on no answer and busy Call queuing for busy system or busy called party 1 1 Section 1 Introduction 1 2 Queuing for telephone ports Registration Radio security check ESN Variable call limit timers by time of day Advanced telephone interconnect features Access to any installed telephone option from any Model 827 Configurable PSTN subscriber line PABX extension or 4 wire E amp M Pulse DTMF MF R1 and MF R2 dialing formats are supported State of the art digital hybrid allowing automatic hybrid balancing Remote setup of telephone hybrid as well as all other audio levels Call prompt tones as well as user customizable voice prompts to guide users accessing the system Programmable dialing plans least cost routing and toll restriction tables Programmable a
20. Section 2 Specifications ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS Indicators Prompt Tones Data Retention Real Time Clock Programming Alarm Monitoring Alarm Inputs Alarm Outputs 2 4 Telco Repeater PTT COR Alarm Bus Status 1 Vox detect FFSK Rx FFSK Tx poll sync Multisite enabled Telco FFSK Rx Telco FFSK Rx Telco Modem Telco DTMF Progress tones and voice prompts error and warning tones and voice prompts sent to telephone Battery backed Retains data for over 5 000 hours 2 800 hours with the telephone option installed when power is removed from the unit There is no drain on the battery when the unit is operating Battery backed Retains data for over 5 000 hours 2 800 hours with the telephone option installed when power is removed from the unit There is no drain on the battery when the unit is operating Remote programming via PC using M827BASE Database program Access via internal modem or local RS 232 port 3 specific system alarms plus 3 non specific 0 5 volts Active ground Inactive open circuit 100 mA 10 volts Active grounds control output Inactive control output open circuit 3 quid Mm 3 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION tin siti ees he 3 1 FRONT AND BACK PANEL INDICATORS AND CONNECTIONS 3 2 Indrvidual wake 3 2 Block NUR 3 2 CONTROL CHANNEL
21. End to End Refer to Figure 4 7 and Table 4 2 Insert 2 wire matrix plug 702 9759 into socket J2 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface Set the jumper on 702 9759 as follows 2 Two wire ringer circuit JP1 3W Three wire shunt ringer circuit Set the jumpers on 702 9758 as follows position B 2 wire JP2 position A Near PSTN connection 2 Wire E amp M Refer to Figure 4 7 and Table 4 2 Insert 4 wire matrix plug 702 9757 into socket J2 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface Set the jumpers on 702 9758 as follows position B 2 wire JP2 position A Near PSTN connection 4 18 Section 4 Installation 4 Wire E amp M Refer to Figure 4 7 and Table 4 2 Insert 4 wire matrix plug 702 9757 into socket J2 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface Set the jumpers on 702 9758 as follows JPl position A 4 wire JP2 position A Near PSTN connection Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option 950 0002 Refer to Figure 4 1 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 10 and Table 4 2 Read the warning box in the next paragraph and then follow the installation instructions given in Appendix C Model 827 UK Telephone Interface Option 950 9640 Refer to Figure 4 1 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 10 and Table 4 2 NOTE The Model 827 telephone interface option is approved only for use with the Model 827 trunking controller supplied by Zetron Inc Use of the product with any other host may result i
22. intervals every few minutes the Model 827 gives the modem AT commands to keep it working 5 If you are using an external modem with your PC connect the modem to your computer s RS 232 COM port Most computer stores carry the necessary modem cable normally a straight through wiring Pay attention to the connectors you will need on both ends of the 5 12 Section 5 Getting Started cable Most modems have a female DB25 connector so the cable must have a male DB25 connector on the modem end The PC COM port will have either a DB9 or DB25 male connector This means the PC end of the cable will need a female DB9 or female DB25 connector Do not confuse the PC s serial COM port with the parallel printer port which is a female DB25 connector on most PCs 6 The modem on your computer requires certain handshaking with M827BASE M827BASE has been set to talk to Hayes modems If the modem does not respond to the Hayes and ATDT commands you may have to change the initialization command string sent by M827BASE to your computer modem Use OTHER CHANGE PC MODEM PARMS from the Main Menu bar to change the initialization string Make sure that your modem is set for Smart operation so it listens for the Hayes commands 7 Connect the modular RJ11 C jack labeled LINE or TELCO on each modem to a telephone line Don t connect to the jacks labeled PHONE or LOCAL these are for telephone sets 8 You will ne
23. 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 9AM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 10AM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 11AM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 Appendix B Statistics Files ok ask Yesterday s Statistics for Unit 3 Time of Day 12PM 1PM 2PM 3PM 4PM 5PM CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 XBusy Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Frames Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Withdrawn Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000
24. 20 Full Duplex N SHORT DATA MSG Allow Multiple Segment Transactions Y Allow SDM2s to be sent to All Call N Repeat SDM2s to Groups and All Call Y PO Figure 6 26 General COS Short Data Message Window 6 46 Section 6 System Programming Call Diversion Parameters The Call Diversion Parameters window allows setting call diversion timeouts and diversion to telephone privileges See Figure 6 27 for an example of the available fields COS GENERAL SUPERVISOR mode INDEX GENERAL COS COS Class Name COS Number 01 01 STANDARD CLASS COS Name STANDARD CLASS Allow Incoming from Phone N Allow to Phone Outgoing Y Emergency Y Autodial N Use Fixed Speech Call Limit N Use Fixed Phone Call Limit Y Data Call Limit Time 05 00 Use Full Off Air Call Setup for HELP DIVERT CALLS Enter the amount of time in hours a diversion request should remain Enter the timeout for call in effect The diversion will be diversion requests 024 automatically cleared when this timeout expired 1 254 hours enter 255 for unlimited default 24 low self divert to phone Y low 3rd party divert to phone Y low self divert on no answer N low self divert on busy N ppp Figure 6 27 General COS Divert Calls Window FLEETS PROGRAMMING The Fleet information can be accessed by selecting UNITS FLEETS Figure 6 28 shows
25. 6 17 Error Correction Control Channel Traffic Channel 6 17 Traite Parameters vUa 6 17 Voice Call Activity 6 18 Maximum Voice Call Inactivity 6 18 Data Call Activity iiie teet ee ert tiende e qaia 6 18 Max Data Call Inactivity 6 19 Enable PRESSBLE OT c eodd cence vacates 6 19 Send Select ve ubi vado e rS 6 19 Enable MAINT 5 6 19 Enable 6 19 Niumberor Messages 6 19 COR Thfesholdsg 6 20 COUNTRY DATA 2 4 0 0 2000000000000000000000000000049 6 20 dortigen TREE 6 21 Wink tuy aec piene tt it o bless tbid du dud 6 21 Minimum Wink DIme s iocos e rfe ita eeu Eco 6 21 Wank Complete Ensuite veo ies since tu iss Five 6 21 Wink DUET 6 22 MFE Modernen Us caa fs iu idet 6 22 Digits in Called Number uice e tte c ui tue 6 23 Required Calling Number epe edet reete eret eo io endet to 6 23 Digits in Calling INUIDDeE uuo erg 6 23 Group IH Cates ory Send uiu cete e 6 23 Calling Number Required aee it gato Repo E EST uade eo MR 6 23 Number to Send eed ie perte 6 23 Cadence Tabl
26. 9 e eee e 2 s ss 89 s gt 6 ie wwe s e e e e s 2 9 4 2 e e 0 s 4 4 6 ee ss e t s ee e s e 4 oe e 8 4 M827 PROCESSOR BOARD 702 024 0277A Figure 4 6 Model 827 Processor Board Component Layout 4 7 Section 4 Installation un REZARE REEL ERATE ZZ 024 0276A Figure 4 7 Model 827 Telephone Interface Board Component Layout Section 4 Installation Figure 4 8 illustrates the telco connections at J1 of the telephone interface board 702 9758 M827 UK 4 WIRE CSD TELEPHONE CABLE 401 0105 5 5 5 X DOUBLE ROW BARRIER CONN 1 8 Figure 4 8 Model 827 UK 4 Wire Telephone Cable Installation Table 4 1 describes the pin configuration for J1 on the telephone interface board Table 4 1 Telco Connections M RETURN BLUE ORANGE RECEIVE HI BLACK TRANSMIT LO s veuow For Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option substitute Figure C 2 in Appendix C 4 9 Section 4 Installation 167 Model 827 Radio Interface B DATA IP
27. A MAINT Selective Clear message is not sent at the start of an inter prefix call Enable MAINT PERIODICS The Enable MAINT PERIODICS field allows the transmission of MAINT Periodic messages from the radio unit to be enabled or disabled If enabled a radio unit will send periodic messages within each speech item it transmits if it is keyed for more than TP seconds Enable SIL 3 Facility The Enable SIL 3 Facility field causes the STI flag to be set to 1 and SIL 3 field to be set to the 3 least significant bits of the SIL sub field of the system identity code in the MAINT Selective Clear MAINT Disable and MAINT Clear messages If a radio unit receives a MAINT message with the STI field set to 1 it will only act on the message if the SIL 3 field matches the three least significant bits of the verified SIL sub field Number of Messages Sent The Number of Messages Sent fields provide the capability of adjusting the number of messages sent by the control and traffic channels in the following cases GTC sets the number of Go To Channel messages the control channel will send for each call setup PRESSEL Inhibit sets the number of PRESSEL On Inhibit messages that will be sent on the traffic channel at the start of a broadcast group call 6 19 Section 6 System Programming Setup Maints sets the number of call setup MAINT messages that will be sent on the control channel Clear Down sets the number of MAINT Clear messages that will b
28. Calls Failed Due to Called Party Unavailable Number of calls that failed because the called unit was unavailable Calls Failed Due to Called Party Busy Number of calls that failed because the called unit was busy or did not wish to accept the call Calls Failed Due to Time out Number of calls that failed because the queue time out for call resources was exceeded TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS When operating as a traffic channel the Model 827 records the following hourly statistics counters 1 2 Seconds Active on Call Total number of seconds used processing calls Seconds Idle Number of seconds the repeater was in a non active state B 2 Appendix B Statistics Files 3 Seconds Busy Number of seconds the repeater was in a non idle state 4 Total Calls Number of calls processed 5 Seconds Clearing Down Calls Number of seconds used clearing down a call from a traffic channel 6 Messages Transmitted Number of messages transmitted by the traffic channel 7 Messages Received Number of messages received by the traffic channel 8 OneBit Error Corrections Number of messages received while in the traffic mode which had a one bit error correction performed on them 9 Bit Pair Error Corrections Number of messages received while in the traffic mode which had a bit pair error correction performed on them 10 Messages Not Decodable w SYNT Number of messages received while in the traffic mode wit
29. Clear DDWEL C o uS cd E E 6 16 Max Units Wait for Response 6 17 Can Control Channel Become Traffic esee 6 17 Control Channel Operation Mode eo bite utar e que 6 17 Cyclic Control Channel Dwell 6 17 Transmit Registration Parameters sess 6 17 Error Correction Control Channel Traffic Channel 6 17 Traffic ed du PM PS EDI dede Ey deci 6 17 Voice Call Activity Indicators eese enne 6 18 Maximum Voice Call Inactivity 6 18 Data Call Activity Indicators esee 6 18 Max Data Call Inactivity 6 19 Enable PRESSEL ON ou ics et S 6 19 Send Selecttve seven MASS Ms ud usb INS RUMOR DEA S tease 6 19 Enable MAINT PERIODIGS 6 19 Enable 5 6 19 Number of Messages Serb cu cederent 6 19 COR S 6 20 COUNTRY DATA 2 6 20 2 dep utei 6 21 Parameters odere 6 21 Minimum Wink 6 21 Wink Complete imme uitio e ebd 6 21 Wink DU ratiOh taceo Sedat ta re eite bee eee 6 2
30. GENERAL Each unit must have a General Class of Service assigned to it to determine what kind of calls the unit is allowed to make GROUPS PROGRAMMING The Group information can be accessed by selecting UNITS GROUPS Figure 6 31 shows the Group data window with the fields highlighted that must be programmed Fields like Priority and Direct Dial Number are discussed above in the Units field descriptions For information on other fields not discussed below please refer to the on screen HELP for each field 6 52 Section 6 System Programming UNITS GROUPS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX GROUPS GROUP NAME FLT GRP V DD Num Group Name TEST GROUP TEST GROUP 0001 090 Y 0000090 Mem of Fleet 0001 Group Number 090 S m Prefix 200 Ident 0002 Priority 2 Valid Y Direct Dial Num 0000090 Enable late entry Y Join Existing Call Y Allow Incoming from Phone Y Play alert tones for incoming phone calls Y HELP Include These Sites in a Group Call lect the fleet this group is a 001 002 003 004 005 006 ember of Press ENTER to see list Rate Code Num of units Comments Create Date 01 24 96 Alter Date Figure 6 31 Required Groups Fields Member of Fleet Mem of Fleet is the M827BASE unique Fleet Number assigned to each fleet defined in M827BASE This field must be filled in from a pop up selection window that lets you select one of the already defined Fleets T
31. Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Empty Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Message Not Allowed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Invalid Message 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Rx Out of Slot 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Registrations 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Registration Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Status Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Status Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful SDM2 Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 SDM2 Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Simple Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Simple Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Emer Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Emer Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 10secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 30secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 60secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Canceled by Orig 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Unavailable 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Busy 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Timed Out 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Active as Control Channel 00 00 00 0
32. If the control channel is the only functioning channel in the system i e it is a single channel system or all other channels are jammed or disabled the control channel will be allocated for traffic regardless of whether the system has been programmed to allow the control channel to become a traffic channel or not Table 3 1 shows examples of how channels would be allocated if no idle traffic channels were available Table 3 1 Traffic Channel Allocation Allocated Allocated Unit if Control Unit if Traffic Cannot Control Can Queue Become Become Status Traffic Traffic Jammed Disabled Disabled Not Full Unit 5 Jammed Idle Disabled Disabled Control Not Full No Channels Unit 2 Control Available Busy Disabled Disabled Busy Not Full Call Queued Call Queued Busy Idle Disabled Busy Control Not Full Call Queued Call Queued Control Call Queued An Idle Control channel is a channel designated as control only but is not currently being used as a control channel A Busy channel is a traffic channel that is currently allocated 3 6 Section 3 Operation Note A line will be set back to idle at the completion of a successful incoming call but the timer will not be reset The timer will be set back to 20 seconds when a successful outbound call is made a clear alarms command from M827BASE is sent for more information on clearing alarms see Getting Started COMM Submenu Selections Other
33. MPT 1327 protocol SITE MPT1327 CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX MPT1327 CONFIG Site _ Site Number 001 001 R MPT1327 Timeouts TA 8055 815 505 TW 5055 Number of Retries AHY Availability Check 2 SDM2 Short Data Messages 2 Traffic Channel Selection L Group Call G Group Ans Timeout 10 HELP Group GTC rate 005 Clear Down 00 30 Enter called unit refresh timeout Max units wait for response WT 6 in seconds 5 120 Default 55 Can Control channel become Traffic Y Control Channel Operation Mode F Transmit Reg parameters N Reg parameters Error correction Cntrl channel 2 Traffic channel 2 CES Figure 6 8 MPT1327 Configuration MPT1327 Window TA Timeout The TA timeout should be set to correspond to the TA time out programmed in the radios in use This timer sets the amount of time a radio will wait for channel allocation signaling after it has responded with an ACK Qual 0 or ACKI Qual 0 This parameter is used by the Model 827 during Full Off Air Call Setup to determine the interval at which to resend AHY messages while it is waiting for the call to be answered TJ Timeout The TJ timeout indicates the amount of a time a requesting radio unit will wait for further signaling for a control transaction with the Model 827 The Control channel must be quiet for this amount of time before the control channel will be switched to another channel TP Timeout The TP timeout is th
34. Next Page Y N This enables a second page of 16 digit plans for a total of 32 Digit Plans per Dial Plan The maximum number of Digit Plans per Dial Plan is 1024 AII 32 possible Dial Plans can be linked together to form a single dial plan having 1024 Digit Plans The trade off is the decrease in distinct Dialing Plans available Link to Another Dial Plan If the second page of the Dial Plan is full and more Digit Plans are needed press ENTER and a window will pop up to allow another dial plan to be linked or appended onto the end of the current dial plan 6 65 Section 6 System Programming Caution Never link the last Dial Plan to the first This may cause the Model 827 to search in an endless loop generating an error indicating that the Dial Plans are linked together in an endless loop If a match is not found in the dial plan then the Model 827 will dial the digits as dialed by the mobile unit on the first available trunk in trunk group zero all active telephone lines are members of trunk group zero The order in which Digit Plans appear within a Dial Plan is unimportant since the Model 827 scans all of the Digit Plans in the Dial Plan until the best match is found Typically many Units will use the same dial plan or plans Each Unit is assigned a Dial Plan in the Roam COS which is discussed in the next subsection In the case of a Mobile Unit dialing an emergency number such as 999 an exact match w
35. SDM2 Call Attempts Successful Simple Calls Simple Call Attempts Successful Emer Calls Emer Call Attempts Calls Queued gt 10secs Calls Queued 30secs Calls Queued gt 60secs Calls Canceled by Orig Calls Failed Party Unavailable Calls Failed Party Busy Calls Failed Party Timed Out Time Active as Control Channel TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call Time Idle Time Busy Total Calls Time Clearing Down Calls Messages Txed Good Responses Bit Errors Bit Pair Errors Not Decodable w SYNT Time RX Jammed Time Cross Busied TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound Num Inbound Calls Time Outbound Num Outbound Calls Time Disabled Disabled Count B 12 6PM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 7PM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 8PM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00
36. The ASCII file created by M827BASE is named S MMDD INF where Site Number MM month DD day The hourly statistics for both today and yesterday for each unit are stored first At the end of the file a graph of the System Loading can be found The System Loading is computed from all the units that are currently active at a site and the unit s statistics have been successfully retrieved The System Loading computation does not look at the database to see how many units are programmed at a particular site Instead it counts the number of units which respond to the statistics retrieval request Units that are disabled at the time of the statistics retrieval are not included in the System Loading computation The System Loading graph uses 120 columns across the page This means that if the ASCII file is sent directly to a printer the printer must be in compressed mode for each line to fit on a page otherwise the printer may truncate the line or wrap around Since the System Loading graph is stored in ASCII the user may also edit the file before printing B 4 Appendix B Statistics Files Unit Hourly Statistics Sample M1327bas V2 30 Statistics Info Site 001 PC Time 05 24 00 16 06 27 Site Number 001 Unit Number 03 Last Reset 05 24 2000 16 01 03 T day s Statistics for Unit 3 k k k k Time of Day 12AM 1AM 2AM 3AM
37. audio outputs set the separate FFSK output modulation level by entering the COMM REPEATER LEVELS K FFSK Out Gain menu with the desired unit selected and press the TAB key until the following is displayed Current FFSK status FFSK ON Press the appropriate level keys to adjust the radio output for 59 of maximum channel deviation 1 5 kHz typical Press ENTER to leave the test 4 COR THRESHOLD Verify proper operation by supplying then removing a signal on the receiver RF frequency The CARRIER LED should light when a signal is being received If the LED operation is backwards off during receive and on with no signal change the COR polarity with JP13 If the COR LED does not change enter the COMM REPEATER LEVELS C COR Threshold menu with the desired unit selected and press the level keys to adjust the COR Threshold until a change takes place 5 DISCRIMINATOR INPUT Adjust the receiver audio level by supplying a full quieting signal to the receiver This signal should have a 1 kHz tone at 40 of maximum deviation 1 0 kHz typical Next adjust the radio audio input gain for the Model 827 Enter the 4 22 Section 4 Installation COMM REPEATER LEVELS I Radio In Gain menu with the desired unit selected and press the appropriate level keys to adjust the radio input gain within the range indicated by Table 4 6 on the Level bar graph display Table 4 6 Model 827 Discriminator Level Adjustment JP10 NOTE Ple
38. country 6 21 dial click detector gain 6 24 digital hybrid 6 25 minimum wink time 6 21 wink complete time 6 21 wink duration 6 22 wink parameters 6 21 create user file 5 31 cross busy 6 27 operation 3 8 cross busy wait time 6 28 cyclic dwell time 6 17 D data call limit time 6 43 database autodial table 6 2 country data 6 1 dial plan 6 1 fleet 6 2 general class of service 6 2 group 6 2 least cost route 6 1 MPT1327 config 6 1 network 6 1 outdial program 6 1 overview 6 1 repeater 6 1 roaming class of service 6 2 site config 6 1 telco ports 6 1 toll class of service 6 1 units 6 2 default trunk group 6 57 delay before dialout 6 35 6 39 delay before prompt 6 34 dial click dectector gain 6 24 dial click mode 6 36 dial plan 6 56 I 2 dialplan 6 58 6 59 6 66 6 67 digit plan 6 65 plan link to another 6 65 plan name 6 65 programming 6 64 6 65 route number 6 65 dialtone required 6 35 digital hybrid 6 25 digits in called number 6 23 digits in calling number 6 23 dip switches 4 5 4 15 flash memory enable 4 5 4 15 multi site option 4 5 4 15 repeater ID number 4 5 4 15 serial communications baud rate 4 13 5 4 telephone line type 4 5 4 15 telephone modem type 4 5 4 15 direct dial number 6 52 direct inward dial 3 16 disconnect on loss of battery 6 34 disconnect on progress tone 6 6 diversion parameters 6 10 6 11 toggle divert on busy 6 11 toggle
39. front panel serial port during the flash memory image download This allows a controller with a front panel baud rate of 1200 to be flash uploaded more quickly 4 30 Section 4 Installation ENABLING YOUR SYSTEM FOR MULTISITE OPERATION If you wish to field upgrade your Model 827s to multi site operation the following steps must be followed l Verify that the Model 827 main firmware version is 2 00 or above and the Master DSP version is 1 11 or above The version numbers can be obtained by connecting to the desired site with M827base and selecting COMM STATUS INFO Order the desired number of multi site options The multi site option must be purchased for each unit at a site up to 5 units If a site has more than 5 units the site will operate in multi site mode as long as at least 5 units have the option installed Using M827base connect to each Model 827 site in which you wish to install the multi site option and select COMM OTHER AUTHORIZE REQUEST CODE a 10 digit authorization code will be displayed on the screen make note of this code and the site from which it was obtained Call fax or e mail Zetron Inc with the authorization codes and the corresponding site numbers you obtained in step 3 above Zetron Inc will provide to you an 8 character key code for each authorization code you provided This code which must be loaded into the same site the authorization code was obtained from Using M827base connect
40. in Section 5 or the unit is reset Call Queuing There are three call queues maintained within the Model 827 one for calls requiring a traffic channel i e speech calls one for calls requiring a telephone port and a third for calls waiting for an ident which is busy Once a queue is full all requests except emergency are responded to with a system overload message Calls remain in the queue for a programmable period of time after which they are deleted from the queue Calls are also removed from the queue if the calling or called unit cancels the call request Programmable thresholds for both the traffic and telco queues are available under the Queuing Parameters window in the MPT1327 Configuration These thresholds set the levels at which dynamic call limits will take affect When the queues reach the specified level of loading then the call limits are reduced by the designated percent in the busy case and are reduced to a fixed value in the overload case Available traffic channel and telephone port resources are allocated as follows faresource is available and there is or more emergency calls in the queue the emergency call which has been queued for the longest period will be allocated e The remaining calls are then allocated resources according to their assigned priority If two or more calls in the queue have equal priority the call that has been queued the longest will be allocated the available re
41. o A JISCRIMINATOR 40 4 amp RPT PATH FFSK QUT DATA Figure 4 9 Model 827 Audio Processing Jumpers 4 10 Section 4 Installation CABLE 702 9757 R 702 9739 Figure 4 10 Installation of Telephone Interface PCB 950 9640 Section 4 Installation Table 4 1 Model 827 Main Board 702 9745 Jumper Settings Jumper Description Settings Control Line 1 Output A Sense 1 Response Gontiguration B TELCO Line Hold Relay Radio Audio Output Configuration IN Continuous OUT Controlled by PTT Relay PTT Relay Configuration A Normally Open B Normally Closed Radio Audio Output Signal A Pre Emphasis Conditioning B Flat COR Selection A Internal B External Radio Data Input Source A Receiver Discriminator Flat Data B Receiver Audio Output De Emphasized Data Radio Audio Input Source A Receiver Discriminator Pre Emphasized Audio B Receiver Audio Output Flat Audio Radio Data Output Configuration A Flat Data Signal B De Emphasized Data Signal C Combined Data amp Audio Signal Voice Prompt Memory A 128 Kbyte SRAM Configuration B 512 Kbyte SRAM COR Sense Polarity A Negative Input B Positive Input Not Used rev C Not Installed rev D Clock Frequency rev C A 12 MHz Not Installed rev D B 16 MHz Default settings are shown in bold text 4 12 Section 4 Installation Table 4 2 Model 827 Telephone
42. ort obit AP IR AUI 2 PHY SICAL SPECIE ICA TIONS 2 1 RADIO SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 RADIO INTERFACE 2 1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS eese 2 2 unns MH 2 2 2 or 4 Wire Private iue iet pet 2 2 INIERSILE 2 3 SYSTEM SITE CAPACTUY 2 3 ACCOUNTING SBBCIBICATIONS dee aes 2 3 ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC A LIONS 2 4 S OPBRATEION en aaa aaa I qM ratu cti n 3 1 SYSTEM DES CRP O N 3 1 FRONT AND BACK PANEL INDICATORS AND CONNECTIONS 3 2 Individuab E BIDS oe cues acida tuns 3 2 Block LB 3 2 CONTROL CHANNEL eta ooa 3 4 Slotted Aloha Protocol eec ue vou od aa ehe Mise 3 5 Registration and Security Code Check eene 3 5 Traffic Channel Allocation iet tan theo rente t aee iore e 3 5 Call 3 7 CROSS BUSY OPERATION ON pet s 3 8 TRAFFIC CHANNEL OPERATION
43. 15 01 30 01 45 02 00 02 15 02 30 02 45 03 00 03 15 03 30 03 45 04 00 04 15 04 30 04 45 05 00 05 15 05 30 05 45 06 00 06 15 06 30 06 45 07 00 07 15 07 30 07 45 08 00 08 15 08 30 08 45 13 Appendix B Statistics Files Today s Traffic Loading Site 001 Hours 12 00 23 45 PC Time 05 30 00 15 06 42 Time 146 40 80 12 00 12 15 A k I SE k CI CI CO I CO OE 12 30 a AH I CH I IC CGE IC 12 45 13 00 o 13 30 a AAA A A ORICA 13 45 AA HEH HE AI SC SC 14 15 CO 14 30 k LYASE AAA a I 15 00 SC CS p 15 15 EAH HE a
44. 2 wire subscriber line 2 wire E amp M or 4 wire E amp M E amp M lines can then be programmed for immediate or wink start and for the number of feed digits to expect An E amp M line can also be programmed to support a microwave link in which the Model 827 will expect overdialed digits as opposed to feed digits Each line can be programmed to dial out using DTMF or pulse dialing MF dialing is also supported for E amp M lines E amp M lines will support incoming DTMF pulse or MF signaling Overdialed digits are in general expected to be DTMF however dial click detection is available and can be enabled on a line by line basis if required Radio Unit to PSTN Calls Outgoing calls to the PSTN are initiated by the mobile unit sending a request for a call with ident of PSTNSIj or PSTNGI An outgoing call to a PSTNSJj ident allows the user to make a call to a prearranged PSTN destination Tables of prearranged numbers autodial tables can be programmed as part of the system programming A pre programmed table can then be assigned to an individual unit 3 13 Section 3 Operation When a call request is received to a PSTNSJj ident the ident itself indicates which entry from the table assigned to the unit requesting the call to dial If no table has been assigned to the unit or the requested entry is not available the call will be rejected An outgoing call to a PSTNGI ident allows the user to make a call to a general PSTN destination When t
45. 200 899 are assigned which identify a block of numbers which can be assigned to individual members of this fleet Once a fleet has been defined units and groups are assigned to the fleet and given either a two or three digit unit range 20 89 or 200 899 or group range 90 99 or 900 998 number depending on the size of the fleet This numbering scheme allows users in the system to use a short form of dialing for most calls assuming that the majority of calls are made to other units which are part of the same fleet The Model 827 uses the MPT1343 numbering scheme for defining users in the system however the M827BASE Database Manager calculates the prefix and ident for each unit and group before sending the information to the Model 827s The prefix and ident are calculated as follows Prefix Number Prefix 200 If the Group Number is two digits then Group Ident Group Number Feet Group Number 2000 2 90 If the Group Number is three digits then Group Ident Group Number Fleet Group Number 2000 2 900 If the Unit Number is two digits then Unit Ident Unit Number Fleet Individual Number 2000 2 20 If the Unit Number is three digits then Unit Ident Unit Number Fleet Individual Number 2000 2 200 3 10 Section 3 Operation Up to 500 fleets 5000 units and 2000 groups can be defined per system Fleets units and groups in a Model 827 system are not defined to be site specific thus requiring a unit which
46. 5 23 retrieve billing 5 20 selections 5 18 statistics 5 23 status info 5 22 telco balance levels 5 24 telco monitor 5 21 update 5 19 communication link to M827 5 3 edit menu index window 5 18 selections 5 17 first time installation 5 1 getting started 5 14 keyboard commands 5 14 local RS 232 link 5 3 main menu screen 5 16 multi site programming using intersite links 5 14 office PC requirements 5 1 remote external modem link 5 10 remote internal modem link 5 5 separate billing file directory 5 2 upgrade installation 5 2 maint periodics enable 6 19 MARK message 6 28 max units wait for response 6 17 member of fleet 6 53 menu COMM 5 18 file 5 29 other 5 31 MF mode 6 22 MF R2 6 22 calling number required 6 23 calling number to send 6 23 digits in called number 6 23 digits in calling number 6 23 group II category to send 6 23 required calling number 6 23 minimum onhook time 6 35 minimum speech PSTN call length to store 6 6 minimum wink time 6 21 miscellaneous service notes 4 29 1 4 modem access number 6 4 modem initialize string set 5 27 morse code 6 28 MPT1327 1 1 3 1 3 10 MPT1327 configuration 1327 parameters 6 15 queuing 6 13 MPT1327 programing network operator identity 6 13 system identity 6 12 system type 6 12 MPT1343 3 10 MPT1343 MPT1327 conversion 3 10 multi site 3 18 billing 3 26 divert on busy 3 25 divert on no answer 3 25 emergency calls demandin
47. 827s such as retrieving billing records A failure on either one of these data buses will trigger an internal alarm that can be programmed to report the alarm TELCO PORTS PROGRAMMING The Telco Ports information is accessed by selecting SITE TELCO PORTS in M827BASE Once a site has been selected you can enable the interconnect for each Model 827 at your site that has an interconnect card installed Figure 6 19 shows the Telco information that must be programmed to match the installed telephone interconnect used in each Model 827 For information on the rest of the fields refer to the on screen HELP for each field 6 32 Section 6 System Programming SITE TELCO PORTS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 TD Unit Number 01 01 E Y Line Type Disable Port Y Auto Balance Hybrids N Enable Voice Prompts Y Allow Landline to Mobile Calls Allow Mobile to Landline Calls Y Enable Disconnect Y HELP Interdigit Timeout 5 0 Line Connects To 0 Edit press ENTER RETURN Trunk Group 00 Guide Window Done Esc Figure 6 19 Required Telco Ports Fields Unit Number The Unit Number field is the Model 827 unit number determined by the front panel DIP switches The DIP switches are located in positions 1 5 of SW2 the switch on the right as you face the Model 827 front panel This number is the telephone line numbe
48. BALANCE LEVELS T Audio To Ph menu with the desired 4 Wire E amp M line selected Using a DVM monitor the differential voltage across the A and B lines from the PSTN Connect the two DVM leads between E3 and E7 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interconnect near telephone connector J1 Press the appropriate level keys to adjust the telephone audio output gain to give a reading of 120 mVrms on the DVM Using an Oscilloscope take a differential reading on the same output and verify the signal is a sine wave C 5 A advanced dial plan 3 15 6 7 AHY availability check retrys 6 16 alarm detection and reporting 3 28 alarm led 4 29 alarms clear 5 27 internal 6 31 sense 6 29 allow all call 6 43 allow calls 6 41 allow incoming from phone 6 54 allow intersite 6 43 allow landline to mobile calls 6 40 allow mobile to landline calls 6 40 aloha frame 6 8 area 6 13 audio levels repeater See M827BASE comm menu repeater levels telco See M827BASE comm menu telco balance levels audio processing jumper selection 4 15 audio sweep 4 29 autodial table programming 6 55 B base DID adder and range 6 39 base station connections COR input 4 17 discriminator input 4 17 ground 4 15 separation FFSK output 4 16 transmitter audio output 4 16 transmitter PTT 4 16 baud rate 6 26 bus led 4 29 busy and reorder 6 24 C cadence table 6 23 call activity indicators data 6 19 data maximum continuous time 6 19 dat
49. Decodable w SYNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Empty Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Message Not Allowed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Invalid Message 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Rx Out of Slot 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Registrations 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Registration Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Status Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Status Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful SDM2 Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 SDM2 Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Simple Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Simple Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Emer Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Emer Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 10secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 30secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 60secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Canceled by Orig 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Unavailable 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Busy 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Timed Out 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Active as Control Channel 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Idle 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Ti
50. Expect After Lead esses 6 6 Use Advanced Dial 55 oM pt bue dps me p 6 7 Call Limit and Aloha Frame Schedule 6 7 Prior C OD adc cuore 6 7 Aloha Pat 6 7 Speech and PSTN UN PRIN EIE 6 8 Iuuen ME E E 6 8 Networkms PAraf eers hv 6 8 Queue Intersite Calls isse eset 6 9 Allow Secondary 6 9 Secondary Registration Timeout essere 6 9 Intersite Queue Timeout ener nnne 6 9 Edit Network Route Table ceteri per 6 9 SIG ioco eM de mM SD E 6 9 Serial NurtDet zucca estet pec brote 6 9 Seral Baud Rate peti teat ua ca uL 6 10 M t ME 6 10 den d Ec 6 10 Diyersion Parameters UE 6 10 Unit Nae MIR pta pdt oda 6 11 Set Status Messages To Toggle Divert on No Answer 6 11 Set Status Messages To Toggle Divert on 6 11 Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position On 6 11 Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position 6 11 MPT1327 CON
51. INDEX SITE CONFIG Site Site Name Country VOICE PROMPT 001 LOCAL SITE UK Access for programming Security code Level for all other tones to Phone 5 Level for all tones to Radio 5 Message Use Levl Compat Tm 01 Welcome V 5 0 04 02 Thank you Ring V 5 0 04 03 Invalid Number V 5 0 04 04 Ovrdial unit grp V 5 0 04 HELP 05 Ovrdial caller ID V 5 0 04 Enter the direct dial digits to access 06 Invalid Unit Grp V 5 0 04 voice prompt recording 07 Unobtain Discon V 5 0 04 08 Intrcnnct no allw V 5 0 04 09 User busy V 5 0 04 10 No answer V 5 0 04 Voice Time Available 064 Total 040 Edit more prompts Y Figure 6 40 Site Configuration Voice Prompt Window Table 6 1 Telephone Prompt Selections Site Wide Selection in Telco Port Selection in Prompts Used on USE Field Enable Voice Prompts Specific Model 827 Field No Prompt 2 Don t Care No Prompts Voice 1 recorded No Tone Prompts Notice in the VOICE PROMPT pop up window displayed in Figure 6 40 that there are several fields that can be adjusted for each prompt whether Tone or Voice is used The Use field specifies whether No prompt a Tone prompt or a Voice prompt is played The Levl or Level field is use to determine the loudness at which each prompt is played The Lev field applies to either tone or voice depending on whether Tone or Voice was selected in the Use field for this prompt The Compat or Compatib
52. INTRODUCTION M827BASE is Zetron s DOS based software management system that runs on an IBM compatible office PC It manages the Model 827 programming information retrieves billing and statistics data retrieves status information allows real time monitoring of both channel and interconnect activity and allows access to all balance and level settings for both repeater and PSTN interfaces INSTALLATION This subsection covers first time as well as upgrade installations It also covers office PC requirements and setting up a separate billing file directory Office PC Requirements The M827BASE database management system for your Model 827 sites and channels operates on an IBM compatible PC using the MS DOS operating system The following is a minimum equipment list for this PC Microprocessor 80386 or higher recommended e Operating System MS DOS version 3 2 or higher e Hard Disk 10 Mbytes minimum free memory space RAM 640 Kbytes minimum 2 Mbytes recommended largest executable program size must be at least 590Kbytes to run M827BASE Floppy Drive 1 2 Mbytes 5 1 4 inch or 1 44 Mbytes 3 1 2 inch Monitor monochrome or color If a printer is to be used the PC must have an available parallel port If the office PC is going to be used for remote connections to the Model 827s at least one modem will be required See COMMUNICATION LINK TO MODEL on page 5 3 for further details First Time Installation If t
53. If any of these alarms occur the alarm LED will light and the alarm state will be reported in the status information when it is retrieved 3 28 Section 3 Operation The external alarms are provided on each Model 827 as analog inputs with a range of 0 to 5 volt Each of input can be programmed separately in the Repeater Configuration to monitor the input continuously or only when the unit is transmitting and the range of valid input voltages When an alarm condition is detected by the voltage being out of range the unit can be programmed to do one or more of the following disable the repeater set a corresponding control output send status to a specified radio Two status values can be programmed corresponding to each alarm input one status value is used if the input value is less than the valid voltage range and another value is used if the value is greater than the valid range In addition each input alarm can be programmed to automatically clear if the input voltage moves back into the valid range or to remain in the alarm condition until cleared by the system operator STATISTICS To assist the system operator in monitoring the traffic and loading of his systems each Model 827 gathers and records statistical information on an hourly basis for the current and previous day This information can be retrieved and stored on your office PC by selecting the COMMISTATISTICS option of the Model 827 Database Program A description of the stat
54. If the parameter field is blank then the calling unit s access number is dialed out The access number is right justified and zero filled i e an access number of 4312 will be dialed as 0004312 EXAMPLE 102880 NC Model 827 will dial 1 0 2 8 8 0 when this statement is encountered PAUSE Stop dialing and pause for programmed period measured in 1 second intervals Range 1 9 EXAMPLE 1 N Model 827 will halt dialing for 1 second when this statement is encountered DETECT Wait up to N second time intervals for dial tone to be detected If no parameter is entered a default of 5 seconds will be used Range 1 9 Default 5 EXAMPLE DETECT 3 N Model 827 will look for Dial Tone for 3 seconds when this statement is encountered DTMF Dial out using Dual Tone Multi Frequency signaling There are no parameters for this command MF Dial out using MF signaling This command has no parameters PULSE Dial out using dial pulse signaling This command has no parameters END Last command of every program This command has no parameters 6 61 Section 6 System Programming Generally to create an OutDial Program in M827BASE select SITE OUTDIAL TABLE Select an existing program number from the index if some already exist and press ENTER to access the Data Screen Type in a new Program Number see Figure 6 36 Note 1 and press ENTER to start a new Program or press ENTER without a new number to edit the existing program
55. Model 827 Telephone Interface Board 702 9758 Table 4 3 on page 4 13 shows the Model 827 Telephone Line Type and RS 232 Baud Rate Settings Table 4 4 on page 4 14 shows the Model 827 Repeater ID and Modem Type Settings Table 4 5 on page 4 15 shows the Model 827 Audio Processing Jumper Selections Table 4 6 on page 4 23 shows the Model 827 Discriminator Level Adjustments 4 2 Section 4 Installation Model 827 Station Supply DC Input 12 Volts DC Ground Ground Phone Line Phone Line PSTN PABX Transmitter Transmit Out High Transmit Audio In High Transmit Out Low Transmit Audio In Low FFSK Out High FFSK In High FFSK Out Low FFSK In Low n N roun p Ground Antenna PTT1 NC NO Transmit PTT Input PTT2 Common 9 Ground Ground mi _ Receiver Duplexer Discriminator High Discriminator Low COR Input Secondary Repeater Control 4 Controller Sense 4 Channel Busy Out Control 1 Sense 1 Control 2 Sense 2 Control 3 Sense 3 Ground Ground Figure 4 1 Typical Model 827 Installation Section 4 Installation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P1 1 Discriminator High 7 Ground 2 Discriminator Low 8 PTT1 NC NO 3 Ground 9 PTT2 Common 4 Transmit Out High 10 FFSK Out High 5 Transmit Out Low 11 FFSK Out Low 6 COR Input 12 Ground Figure 4 2 Model 827 Repeater Cable Connector Pinout For the Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option subst
56. PABX Direct Dial Calls Direct dial calls are those in which the PSTN or PABX provides feed digits to the Model 827 The number of feed digits expected is programmable by telco port The following direct dialing schemes are supported 1 Direct mapping of the incoming digits to a particular unit or group Section 3 Operation 2 Mapping of the incoming digits to a fleet the user is then required to overdial the 2 or 3 digit group or individual number 3 Mapping of the incoming digits to a number which allows overdialing by the caller as described in the previous subsection Multi Site Operation The Multi site software option provides the capability of linking a Model 827 site to up to 32 other Model 827 sites Linking is accomplished using 2 4 wire leased circuits or 4 wire E amp M microwave links and optionally a serial data link The serial data link is not required since the system is capable of sending data over the leased circuits and microwave links using an FFSK modem The serial data link will however increase performance since a data path is always available to another site even if the audio links are in use and the data rate is faster than that used on the audio links Sites can be linked together using several different topologies such as a circle a star or a mesh configuration Figure 3 3 below shows several typical typologies It is important to note that the more intermediate sites that must be traversed to reach the de
57. Prompt Compatibility scat uo tae rete i utt eet as 6 70 Contents continued Voice Prompt enact 6 70 Voice Prompt Programming 244 00 6 71 Voice Programming 6 72 Endinga Recordin seo ans i 6 72 Ton Prompts eie EO ARD e GA 6 74 Voice Prompts Lista once et RTI HH DIRE Rer de pas nde 6 74 Appendix AvG ALL DETAIL FILES 1 CATT DETAI aE SESE 1 CALL DETAIL RECORD FORMAT eiie ists ote best 1 USER FILE RECORD FORMAT 7 Appendix B STATISTICS FILES a i a 1 CONTROL CHANNELS TA TIS TICS edite obe iet dotes doas B 1 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS HERE ONSE UR Reads B 2 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT 5 8 5 B 3 SAMPLE STATISTICS HLE chan gees Ned DNI gau mai ne B 4 Unit Hourly Statistics Sample irc ptite B 5 System Loading Sample ssa doe NO Serge a Bea wo cage ae oe B 13 Appendix C CANADIAN TELEPHONE INTERFACE OPTION eene C 1 PS LIN CONNEC TIONS 6 I MEME PUR MISI UM C 1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE INSTALLATION C 2 DEUS Mute adsis ub au Ese Efe C 2 2 Wire E amp M Trunks ono
58. Service controls the type of calls that a user is permitted to divert as well as whether the user is allowed to set clear divert on busy or no answer The General Class of Service also controls whether a diversion should expire after a programmed number of hours or remain in effect until canceled RQX Abort Transaction A radio unit wishing to cancel a previous call request that has not yet been set up can do so by transmitting a RQX message INTERCONNECT OPTION An optional telephone interface board can be added to any or all Model 827s at a site to provide access to the PSTN a PABX or another Model 827 site Regardless of which logic unit s has a telephone interface installed all channels have access to the telephone interface via the PCM audio bus A Model 827 site with one or more telephone interface boards installed brings to the site a wide range of advanced interconnect features such as voice prompts programmable speed dials call limit timers programmable by time of day or fixed per individual unit toll call restrictions least cost routing and automatic hybrid balancing To meet a wide range of telephone system characteristics in different countries telephone parameters such as pulse and DTMF timings maximum levels and tone cadences are selectable by country Line Types The Model 827 with the telephone option installed can be configured via a matrix plug dip switch and jumper settings and database programming to
59. System Configuration switch SW1 on the Model 827 M827BASE defaults to a baud rate of 9600 An RS 232 cable is properly connected between PC and Program port J3 on the Model 827 The repeater ID number as set on System Configuration switch SW2 corresponds to the Model 827 under test Telephone Line type as set on System Configuration switch SW1 corresponds to the PSTN connection to the Model 827 under test A repeater record has been created with the Receive and Transmit Delay fields programmed for the Model 827 being adjusted if the transmitter and or receiver being used introduces an audio delay This is done by selecting EDITIREPEATER see Section 6 If the Motorola MTR2000 is being used the Transmit Delay should be set to 6 bit times and the Receive Delay should be set to 3 bit times Also note On some computers the CTRL UP and CTLR DOWN keys do not function as expected use the CTRL RIGHT keys in place of CTRL UP and use the CTRL LEFT keys in place of CTRL DOWN Radio Levels to and from the radio are adjusted on a Model 827 by using M827BASE and selecting the COMMIREPEATER LEVELS menu option When this option is selected a monitor screen will appear displaying all units that are part of the system you are connected to By using the cursor keys highlight the unit that you would like to adjust and press ENTER The HYBRID BALANCE AND LEVEL SETTINGS menu will appear The highlighted options are available for selection
60. Time Active w Call 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Idle 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Busy 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Total Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Clearing Down Calls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Messages Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time RX Jammed 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Cross Busied 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Inbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Outbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Outbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 B 8 Appendix B Statistics Files egterday s Statistics for Unit 3 Time of Day 12AM 1AM 2AM 3AM 4AM 5AM CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 XBusy Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Frames Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Withdrawn Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not
61. Units Level 2 4 Continued Figure 5 21 Password Access Levels 5 33 Section 5 Getting Started Main Menu Continued 5 34 Comm Menu Continued Retrieve Call Detail eve Channel Monitor Telco Monitor Level Status Info Level Statistics eve Repeater Levels evel Telco Balance levels evel Other Set Time Level Password evel Modem String evel Clear Ca detail eve Alarms Rollover Statistics eve Reset Units soft eve Units hard eve Retrieve Site Status Level Authorize Request Code eve Enable Multi Sit vel File Print Site Site Config MPT1327 Config Network Repeater Telco Ports Dial Plan Least Cost Route OutDial Table Toll Class of Service Country data COS Units Backup Configuration data call Detai Restore Configuration data cal Detai Other change PC modem parms change Database manager password creat Exit User fal 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 4 1 4 3 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 0 1 2 3 4 1 4 1 4 Level 1 4 evel 1 4 evel 1 4 evel 1 4 Level 1 4 Level 1 4 Level 1 4 evel 1 4 1 1 2 4 Level 1 4 evel 14 2 4 evel 2 4 evel 1 2 3 4 evel 1 2 3 4 1 4 1 4 Level 1 4 evel 1 4 evel 3 4 evel 0 1 2 3 4 Fig
62. allocated 6 Both the called and calling parties will be checked with an AHOY message If both mobiles are still available audio will be connected and digit will be transmitted which is used to synchronize the Go To Channel messages on the control channel between the two sites Group Calls Group calls are slightly different from individual calls When a group call is placed the linking may fan out to include up to six sites These sites are defined at the time the group is defined in the database The network information tables define how to link to each site included in the group When a group call is requested those sites that are available are included in the call Sites that are not available are not included nor are they added to the call if they become available during the duration of the call Audio from all the sites included in a group call is summed and transmitted out the appropriate radio or telephone ports allowing any one site to hear all the other sites 3 24 Section 3 Operation Emergency Calls Demanding Resources in a Multi Site Network Finding the required resources for a multi site emergency call is more complex than the single site case Sometimes a traffic channel as well as an intersite link are required other times just an intersite link from a certain trunk group is required and sometimes just a PSTN port or just a traffic channel is required When both an intersite link and a traffic channel are
63. answer or busy toggle switch to the ON position it will send this status message back to the calling unit Reply Status Messages For Toggle Switch Position Off When the control channel toggles either the divert on no answer or busy toggle switch to the OFF position it will send this status message back to the calling unit SITI Si 00 H En fo Section 6 System Programming MPT1327 CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING The MPT1327 Configuration can be accessed by selecting SITE MPT1327 CONFIG in M827BASE Once a site has been selected you can program all of the MPT 1327 parameters for this site Figure 6 6 shows the MPT 1327 information that must be programmed for each site E MPT1327 CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX MPT1327 CONFIG Site Number 001 1 R System Type R REGIONAL Edit Q System Identity 00A1 Edit M Network operator identity 001 Edit T Zone field length Zone data Area field length Area data 002 Free field length Free data ELP SIL field length 3 ter the Network Operator Identity SIL data r this Regional System 0 127 LAB Sub field 001 Figure 6 6 Required MPT1327 Configuration Fields System Type The System Type field specifies whether your MPT 1327 System is a Regional or National system This defines the System Identity Code that is continuously being sent by the control channel Entering for Regional N for National will cause a window to pop u
64. any type that can pass through the RF channel During nonstandard data calls the traffic channel transmitter is keyed up continuously and data audio paths are setup The call is terminated by the data call inactivity timer expiring the COR on timer expiring reception of a MAINT DISCONNECT message or the expiration of the data call limit timer FLEETS UNITS AND GROUPS The MPT1327 protocol defines an addressing scheme that allows for over one million unique addresses These addresses can be assigned to individual units or groups of units and consist of a 7 bit prefix and 13 bit ident Prefixes can range from 0 127 and idents from 1 8100 Idents above 8100 are designated as special and are not available for allocation to units An additional numbering scheme MPT 1343 has been defined for the identification of units within a MPT1327 system This numbering scheme organizes units and groups into fleets The identity range is divided into blocks that are assigned to fleets by the system operator For each fleet a number prefix range 200 327 is assigned which sets the prefix for all units and groups within the fleet A fleet group number range 2001 6050 and two or three digit last group number range 90 99 or 900 998 are assigned which identify a block of numbers which are available to be assigned to groups within this fleet In addition a fleet individual range 2001 6050 and a two or three digit last individual number range 20 89 or
65. being OR d together LAB Sub field The LAB sub field governs acquisition and retention of a control channel Four control categories are available which are designated A B C and D 001 categories permitted 002 Categories A and B only permitted 003 Categories C and D only permitted 004 Category A only 005 Category B only 006 Category C only 007 Category D only MPT1327 Configuration Queuing The MPT1327 protocol is designed for use by systems that queue calls that cannot be set up immediately due to resources not being available For example all the telephone lines are currently in use when a radio requests a PSTN or PABX call the request will be queued for the next available telephone line Queuing can be enabled for traffic channels telephone ports or calls can be queued for a busy unit Each of these queues can be enabled individually as well as the depth of the queue and the maximum amount of time a unit is allowed to remain in the queue as shown in Figure 6 7 6 13 SIT Si 00 Hl En no ch Section 6 System Programming E MPT1327 CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX MPT1327 CONFIG pere Site Number 001 1 R System Type R QUEUING Queue simple speech and non standard data calls for Depth Timeout Traffic Channels Y 002 00 30 Telephone Ports Y 002 00 30 Called Unit Busy Y 002 00 30 ELP Queue for called unit busy ter Y to queue simple speech and Status Calls Y Short Data Ca
66. e Destination of mobile to landline PSTN or PABX Group Call type broadcast or conference e Start Hour and Minute Call Duration in seconds e Status successful or failed e Traffic Channel assigned not used for registration or status e Telco Line Assigned used only for landline calls Dial String digits dialed to phone used only for mobile to landline calls e Sites included in multi site group call Originating destination and home site for intersite calls e Incoming and outgoing links used for intersite3 calls ALARM DETECTION AND REPORTING Each Model 827 is capable of monitoring 6 internal and 3 external alarms The Site Configuration allows the system owner to select whether 3 of the internal and all of the external alarms should be reported by sending a status message to a selected mobile radio The Repeater Configuration allows each alarm to be enabled individually for each Model 827 The internal alarms available are call detail storage buffer full repeater serial bus failure subscriber database serial bus failure receiver jammed battery low and heap space low The first three alarms through the Repeater Configuration database programming can be enabled or disabled The system operator can also program whether the alarm should be reported to a mobile and can assign a status value to report that corresponds to the alarm The receiver jammed battery low and heap space low alarms are not configurable
67. from Zetron need to be copied into the C zflash directory 2 Copy the flash software update to the C zflash directory 3 Connect a serial cable from the PC to the front panel serial port on the controller See COMUNICATION LINK TO MODEL 827 in Section 5 4 Select the C zflash directory and execute FLASH EXE 5 The flash memory utility will probe the default comm port attempting to connect to a Model 827 or Model 844 To specify the default comm when executing FLASH EXE type FLASH lt gt where n is the comm port number 1 2 3 4 The default comm port can be permanently set by using the F3 configuration menu 6 After a successful connection the controller s current software version is displayed 7 Pressing the F2 program key will display the flash memory image s software version and confirms the software update process 8 During the upload process the program displays actions performed and their status After the upload is complete the flash memory image is validated The controller is reset if the flash memory image validates correctly Configuring flash memory utility Press the F3 key to invoke the configuration menu The default comm port baud rate and programming baud rate are configured using this menu When attempting to connect to a controller the default baud rate is used first followed by the remaining baud rates supported by the controller The programming baud rate overrides the baud rate of the controllers
68. hook looking for dial tone for the amount of time entered in the Dialtone Seek Time field If dial tone is detected the Model 827 continues setting up the call If the Dialtone Seek Time expires without dial tone being detected the Model 827 will continue setting up the call if the Dialtone Required field is set to If the Dialtone Required field is set to Y the call will not be placed on this telephone line and the Model 827 system will look for another available line to place the call on Delay Before Dialout The Delay Before Dialout field is used to insert a delay between when dial tone is detected or the dial tone seek time expires and when the Model 827 actually dials the digits either pulse or DTMF to the PSTN PABX 6 35 Section 6 System Programming Dial Click Mode The Dial Click Mode enables and selects one of four algorithms available for decoding dial clicks This would be used in an installation where rotary telephones are still in use This allows the rotary telephone user to overdial digits to call a mobile unit When dial click decoding is enabled the Model 827 will detect both DTMF digits and dial clicks when expecting overdial digits The Model 827 will look for dial clicks until a DTMF digit is decoded At this point the Model 827 will disable the dial click decoding and just look for DTME overdialing In this manner the Model 827 can receive overdial digits from either a DTMF telephone or a rotary telephone
69. impedance 1000Hz Connector 12 position detachable screw strip Modulation Depends on transmitter 2 Section 2 Specifications TELEPHONE INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS Line Type From Telco To Telco Signaling Connector Adapter Progress Tones Modem End to End Ringer equivalence Incoming Call Call Answer Call Disconnect Configurable End to End PSTN subscriber line PABX extension or 2 or 4 wire E amp M 24 dBm to 3 dBm 20 dBm to 0 dBm DTMF Dial Pulse MFR1 or MFR2 RJ45 C RJ45 C to BT 631A plug 3 meter Dial Tone Ringing and Busy Internal 300 1200 2400 baud modem configurable to Bell 212 or CCITT V 22 and CCITT V 22bis 3 Programmable rings to answer Off hook tip ring current draw Call progress tone detection tone cadence is programmable call limit timer radio unit s inactivity timeout loss of loop current DTMF received from telephone 2 or 4 Wire Private Circuit Signaling Incoming Call Call Answer Call Disconnect 2 2 E amp M Detection of voltage on E lead M lea is a 2 lead circuit with user selectable normally open normally closed relay contact Model 827 has M output lead and M return lead Call Progress tone detection call limit timer radio unit s inactivity timer removal of voltage from E lead DTMF received from telephone INTERSITE LINKING Speech and Data Serial Data Option SYSTEM SITE CAPACITY Radio Channels Sit
70. in the password screen before the Main Menu screen appears The following items will appear all of the time or part of the time while you are on the Main Menu e The software banner is located across the top of the screen The left hand side of the banner contains program title version and copyright information The right hand side displays the mode or level at which the user logged in if passwords have been set up The Main Menu bar is located just below the banner It lists six submenus that can be selected e Underneath the selected submenu on the Main Menu bar a submenu window 15 visible which lists the individual operations available within the submenu e The Help Window is located at the bottom left corner of the screen The help window contains information about the currently selected or highlighted item on the Menu Asingle line Alert and Status message field is located at the very bottom left corner below the Help window This field will be blank unless there is an error or status message pertaining to the current circumstances or operations e A Status window may appear in the lower right corner of the screen The screen will contain additional status information or instructions for the Comm File and Other submenus from the Main Menu bar When the Main Menu is first entered the Site submenu will be selected from the Main Menu bar with the Site config item highlighted in the submenu window see Figure 5 8 Use the u
71. in this mode Options are selected by entering the letter representing the option and hitting ENTER From any selected option the ENTER key will return to the menu and the ESC key will return to the monitor screen allowing the selection of another unit 4 2 Section 4 Installation In the adjustment steps below the menu item to select from the HYBRID BALANCE AND LEVEL SETTINGS menu is shown in lower case letters as follows COMM REPEATER LEVELS O Radio Out Gain where O Radio Out Gain is the menu option to select 1 PTT Verify proper PTT operation by entering the COMM REPEATER LEVELS O Radio Output Gain menu with the desired unit selected and pressing the TAB key until the following is displayed Current tone status TONE ON This will apply a 1 kHz tone to the transmitter and it should key up at this time If not check the wiring between the Model 827 and the transmitter Press the TAB key again to unkey the transmitter 2 TRANSMIT AUDIO To adjust the transmit audio level output for the Model 827 enter the COMM REPEATER LEVELS O Radio Output Gain menu with the desired unit selected and press the TAB key until the following is displayed Current tone status TONE ON Press the appropriate level keys to adjust the radio output for 60 of maximum channel deviation 1 53 kHz typical Press ENTER to leave the test 3 5 ENCODE For a transmitter configuration requiring separate FFSK and transmit
72. individual radio units The COS database information is considered System Wide This means that the COS information is applied to all physical sites in the system The last submenu Units contains all the system wide information necessary for setting up radio users It contains fleet group unit and autodial information These three edit submenus allow you to add to or change your database To begin editing first select SITE SITE CONFIG and create a site by entering a number in the Site Number field Then MPT1327 Config Repeaters Telco Ports Dial Plans Least Cost Routes OutDial Table and Toll Class of Service information can then be entered for each existing site Some fields on a data window are linked to another window which will pop up when certain values are entered in the field and the Enter Key is pressed These fields are marked with a ec 99 Section 5 Getting Started Index Window Anytime there is more than one entry in a database file an index window will appear to allow you to select a particular entry table to edit When a submenu item is first activated the cursor will be in the index window allowing you to page up and down or find a particular entry to edit The index window shows a nine record portion of the data file while the data window will show one record in full detail The index window gives you a quick overview of a few data records Those data fields that are used for sorting are shown in the index
73. is pulled from the Country data Wink Duration field See Figure 6 11 on page 6 21 The Supervision Type for Outgoing Calls tells the Model 827 what type of supervision to expect when initiating a telephone call The following settings are available I Immediate start tells the Model 827 to go ahead and dial the digits immediately after seizing the M Lead A delay after seizing the M Lead and dialing digits can be inserted using the Delay before Dialout field Wink start means that the Model 827 will seize the M Lead and wait for a wink on the E Lead from the PST PABX before dialing If a wink is not detected the call will fail The Model 827 qualifies a wink from the Min Wink Time and Wink Complete Time in the Country data see Figure 6 11 6 37 Section 6 System Programming D Dial Tone tells the Model 827 to look for dial tone from the PSTN PABX The Model 827 will look for dial tone for up to the amount of time entered in the Start Super Seek Time If dial tone is detected the Model 827 will dial otherwise it will wait until the Start Supervision Seek Time expires and then dial Incoming Signaling Type The Incoming Signaling Type tells the Model 827 how the PSTN PABX will be sending feed digits The Model 827 will turn on the appropriate decoder to receive feed digits E amp M Type 1 The E amp M Type 1 field applies to outgoing telephone calls it tells the Model 827 whether or not the PSTN
74. maximum number of ringers that may be connected to a specific telephone line is determined by adding up the individual REN values of the desired instruments and insuring that their total does not exceed 4 0 Telephone Interface Option The Model 827 with a telephone interface option installed is not intended to receive calls from naive callers A naive caller is one with no special knowledge of the characteristics of the auto answering system Model 827 with Telephone Interface option If the Model 827 with a telephone interface option installed is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network the telephone number must not be made public The Model 827 telephone interface option is not suitable for connection as an extension to a payphone or for use with a 1 1 carrier system WARNING The Model 827 telephone interface option is not suitable for use on speech band circuits with signaling at a nominal frequency of 2280 Hz The Model 827 telephone interface option is suitable for point to point circuits only The Model 827 telephone interface option does use the frequency range of zero to 200 Hz The Model 827 telephone interface option may be connected directly to a speech band circuit or to a relevant branch of a speech band circuit Cables wiring and or other equipment connected between the Model 827 telephone interface option and the point of connection to a speech band circuit shall comply with the following 1 The ove
75. modem initialization string sent to the modem connected to your Figure 5 19 otHer Menu Options e The Change PC Modem Parms menu item in the Other submenu lets you change the initialization information sent by your office computer to the modem on your computer s serial port This is sometimes necessary since not all brands of modem are truly Hayes compatible e The Change Database Manager password operation allows you to change the password used by M827BASE to access your Model 827s This selection only changes the password in M827BASE and not in the Model 827s If you wish to change the password in both M827BASE and the Model 827s use COMM OTHER SET PASSWORD The Create User File menu option allows the C MMDD U00 user file which is used by a billing package such as Zebra to be created for any programmed site without having to retrieve billing information from a site Please see Appendix A for more information on the user file You can exit from M827BASE by using the Esc key or by selecting OTHER EXIT 5 31 Section 5 Getting Started PASSWORDS There are two types of passwords used in M827BASE only the user passwords are discussed in this subsection The other type of password is referred to as Database Manager Passwords see Other on page 5 25 and OTHER Menu Selections on page 5 31 The user passwords provide a security feature to prevent unauthorized access to M827BASE After first instal
76. on page 6 50 So a telephone number like 3434566 will be assigned to Joe s mobile unit by entering 3434566 in the Direct Dial Number field in Joe s Unit Record In the Base DID Adder the number 3434000 is entered In the Range of DID Numbers 0000500 is entered in the low field and 0000599 is entered in the high field Now when a telephone user dials 3434566 the Model 827 detects an incoming call and receives the 3 feed digits 566 The Model 827 compares 566 against the low and high Range of DID Numbers in this table and finds that the feed digits fall in the range of the first row The Model 827 then adds the Base DID Adder from the first row to the feed digits received to get the 7 digit Direct Dial Number 3434000 566 3434566 The Model 827 now searches the Direct Dial Numbers for Fleets Groups and Units until a match is found in the Unit Records for Joe s mobile unit The Model 827 requests a traffic channel to establish the call to Joe s unit Auto Balance Hybrids Two wire telephone circuits like End to End must have the hybrid balanced against the local PSTN PABX telephone equipment If the local PSTN PABX provides a quiet termination point it is possible to automate this process A quiet termination point would be a dedicated telephone number which when dialed the line is answered and silence is returned The Model 827 can be programmed to call this quiet termination number once a day at the programmed time Once silence is
77. present The Rings Until Answer field determines how many times the Model 827 will let an incoming call ring before it goes off hook to answer the call If a 1 is entered in this field the Model 827 will answer as soon as ringing voltage is removed after the initial Connect Time Required has been satisfied If a number greater than 1 is entered in this field the Model 827 will count ringing cycles according to the Ringing entry in the Cadence Table see Figure 6 13 on page 6 24 As soon as the number of ringing cycles in the Rings Until Answer has been satisfied and the current ringing voltage is no longer present the Model 827 will answer the call Minimum Onhook Time The Min Onhook Time is the minimum amount of time the Model 827 MUST remain on hook after a call has ended before the line can be used for an outgoing telephone call So this would be the amount of time the PSTN requires that a line be on hook for it to determine the line is idle Note that this only applies to the next outgoing call on the Model 827 If the PSTN detected that the line was idle and placed an incoming call before the Min Onhook Time had expired in the Model 827 the Model 827 would still detect the incoming call Dialtone Required and Seek Time The Dialtone Required field applies to outgoing calls to the PSTN and works in conjunction with the Dialtone Seek Time field When an outgoing call is initiated the Model 827 will take the telephone line off
78. refer to Figure 6 9 for a sample of the MPT1327 Traffic Parameters Section 6 System Programming SITE MPT1327 CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX MPT1327 CONFIG Site _ TRAFFIC 001 R Voice Call Activity Indicators COR Y Maint Msg Y VOX Y Max Voice Call Inactivity Time 030 Data Call Activity Indicators X2 Max Data Call Inactivity Time 030 Enable Pressel On For Simple Y Group Y PSTN Y HELP Send Selective Clear Y Enter Y if COR should be used to check Enable MAINT PERIODICS y for call activity Enable SIL 3 Facility Y Number of Messages Sent GIC 2 Pressel Inhibit 2 Setup Maints 1 Clear Down 4 COR Thresholds Active 050 Inactive 020 Figure 6 9 MPT1327 Configuration Traffic Window Voice Call Activity Indicators The Voice Call Activity Indicators enable and disable methods for determining the presence of call activity on a traffic channel The presence of activity can be determined by one or more of the following COR signal reception of MAINT Messages from the radio unit or VOX detection from the telco port on radio to from telephone calls If Y is entered to use COR for activity detection a window will pop up containing the Max Transmit Time This field sets the maximum continuous time a mobile is allowed to transmit during a voice call If this time expires the call will be dropped Maximum Voice Call Inactivity Time The Max Voice Call I
79. required at the initiating site first the intersite link resources will be freed and then if a traffic channel was not freed in the process one will be freed If no data path is available to the called unit s home site to get registration information a non emergency call using the data path will be knocked down to get the registration information When a radio requests an emergency call to a radio located at another site at each site along the way where resources are required the database demand resources flag at that site will be queried At an intermediate site if emergency calls demand resources at this site and no outgoing intersite links are available a non emergency call using an intersite link in the necessary trunk group will be knocked down When the destination site receives a request for an emergency call and no traffic channels are available it will check it s site database to see if emergency calls demand resources and knock down a non emergency call using a traffic channel Requests for emergency group calls and outgoing PSTN calls will be handled much the same way When an emergency outgoing PSTN call request arrives at a destination site and a PSTN port is not available a non emergency call using a PSTN port in the trunk group will be knocked down to provide an outgoing PSTN port for the emergency call The system will attempt to get the resources for all sites included in an emergency group call but if resources do not become
80. screen there are two fields which are display only The first displays the total Available voice memory in seconds which is 64 seconds The second displays the Total allocated time this total will change as time is decreased or increased in any of the individual Tm fields Notice also that all of the available prompts do not fit on the screen To view the rest of the prompts enter a in the Edit more prompts field at the very bottom of the screen All of the voice prompts are recorded 6 70 Section 6 System Programming sequentially in memory so increasing or decreasing the maximum length of any voice prompt will affect itself as well as all of the voice prompts which sequentially follow it This means that changing the length of the last voice prompt prompt 16 will only affect that prompt because there are no prompts following Changing the time of the first prompt will affect all of the prompts because all the voice memory must be re calculated The result is that changing the length of any voice prompt will cause that prompt and all prompts following to be erased and must be re recorded Caution Changing the allocated time for any voice prompt will cause that prompt and all prompts with a greater number to be erased and must be re recorded Each voice prompt is designed to be played at a certain point during an interconnect call Most of the prompts are used during call setup when the call is being initiated
81. site If the allocated port is an intersite link the call will be forwarded to the next site If the port is a PSTN PABX port the number will be dialed out the port and audio connected across the network At each subsequent site the intersite PSTN call request will be handled in the same manner Each site along the way will apply the Least Cost Routing method to the dialed digits and forward the call as if the calling radio were located at this site In this manner an intersite PSTN call request will route itself through the network looking for a free PSTN PABX port to place the call on When a PSTN PABX port has been found a message will be sent back towards the initiating site to indicate that the call is proceeding and audio needs to be connected Each site along the way will receive this message connect audio and forward the message back toward the initiating site When the initiating site receives the message it will send the requesting unit to a traffic channel and connect the audio The calling radio will be connected as the digits are being dialed out to the PSTN PABX port Programming the Least Cost Routing feature at each site in a multi site network is much the same as programming routing information in a PABX or in PABX s that are connected via a tie line It is not an impossible task but it can be confusing The Network should be sketched out with the intersite trunk groups and PSTN PABX trunk groups and all the routing informati
82. site has access to Status is returned on the channels telco lines intersite audio links and intersite data links at the requested site Figure 5 17 below shows an example Site Status screen This menu option is available only with Model 827s with firmware version 2 00 or above COMM OTHER RETRIEV SITE STATUS SUPERVISOR mode Model 827 Site Status Site 001 24 Jan 2000 13 00 16 UNIT CHAN TELCO LINK SERIAL UNIT CHAN TELCO LINK SERIAL 01 IDLE IDLE 17 02 18 03 IDLE 19 BUSY 04 20 05 JAMMED 21 06 22 07 23 08 24 09 25 10 26 11 21 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 16 32 Hit ESC to quit Figure 5 17 Site Status Authorize Submenu The Authorize submenu contains two options e The Request Code option queries the Model 827 site for a challenge number which is required to enable multi site operation in field The challenge number returned from the Model 827 site is displayed on the screen and must be provided to Zetron Upon receiving this number Zetron will provide a key code to the customer which must be entered into the Model 827 site using the Enable Multisite option to enable multi site operation e The Enable Multisite option sends the key code provided by Zetron Inc the Model 827 site to enable multi site operation 5 28 Section 5 Getting Started FILE Menu Selections The File menu allows you to execute three different file operations which p
83. statistics counters 1 Slots Transmitted Number of control channel slots transmitted MPT 1327 1 3 1 2 Cross Busy Slots Transmitted Number of control channel slots transmitted while control channel was operating in a burst cross busy mode 3 Frames Transmitted Number of control channel frames transmitted MPT 1327 1 3 3 4 Withdrawn Slots Transmitted Number of control channel slots in which random access was inhibited MPT 1327 7 2 5 5 Good Responses Number of valid messages received 6 One Bit Error Corrections Number of messages that had a one bit error correction performed on them 7 Bit Pair Error Corrections Number of messages that had a bit pair error correction performed on them 8 Message Not Decodable w SYNC Number of messages with non correctable errors 9 Empty Slots Number of control channel slots in which no message was received 10 Message not Allowed in Slot Number of messages received in reserved slot MPT 1327 7 2 5 11 Invalid Message Number of invalid messages received Invalid messages are messages not supported by the system or received in the incorrect sequence 12 Message Received Outside Slot Timing Boundaries Number of valid messages that were received outside the valid slot timing boundaries MPT 1327 6 2 1 3 13 Successful Registrations Number of radio unit registrations accepted by the system 14 Registration Attempts Number of units attempting registra
84. the Fleet data window with the fields highlighted that must be programmed Each field is discussed below For information on the rest of the fields on the data window please refer to the on screen HELP for each field 6 47 Section 6 System Programming UNITS FLEETS INDEX Num Fleet Name Pfx Group 0001 TRUCKING CO Y 200 2007 09 HELP Enter the number prefix for this fleet 200 327 1 N D C SUPERVISOR mode FLEETS ndex Num 0001 leet Name TRUCKING CO ome Site 001 Valid Y umber Prefix 200 irect Dial Number 0000061 leet Grp 2007 Last Grp 094 leet Indiv 2001 Last Indiv 030 ustomer Information Account 1 Edit Additional Customer Info Y omments reate Date 05 09 96 lter Date Figure 6 26 Required Fleets Fields Index Number The Index Num field is a unique arbitrary number that identifies this fleet in the M827BASE database Fleet Number The Fleet Number is later used when defining Groups and Units Each Unit and Group must be associated with a Fleet and this number is the means by which M827BASE makes that association Home Site The Home Site specifies the Home Site for roaming for all units assigned to this fleet This field is selected from a table of sites that have already been defined in M827BASE Number Prefix The Number Prefix is the MPT1343 Num
85. the Model 827 site is located in the same time zone If the Model 827 site is in a different time zone than the PC the number of hours difference and whether the Model 827 site is Earlier or Later can be specified If this field is set to then the user must manually enter the time and date when the COMM OTHER SET TIME menu item is activated For more information refer to Other in Section 5 Note M827BASE cannot automatically send the time date to the Model 827 site The Set M827 time from PC time only determines how M827BASE proceeds when the COMM OTHER SET TIME menu item is activated Modem Access Number The Modem access number field must be programmed properly for remote internal modem access to the Model 827 site using M827BASE For more details see Remote Internal Modem Link in Section 5 Repeater Jammed Reset Time The Repeater Jammed reset time determines how long COR must be inactive on the channel before the Model 827 decides that the channel is no longer jammed Emergency Calls Demand Resources Setting the Emerg calls demand resources field to Y tells the Model 827 to free resources for emergency calls If the traffic channels and or telco ports are all busy when an emergency call is requested the Model 827 will find the lowest priority user which has had control of a resource for the longest period of time and disconnect the call to allocate resources for the emergency call Emergency
86. the fields shown in Figure 6 21 on page 6 37 For a description of how the short number access for overdialing works refer to PSTN PABX Overdial Speech Calls in Section 3 The short number access allows the telephone user to overdial the digits PD D2 D where P and n are defined in the last two fields of Figure 6 2 on page 6 5 For example define P 4 in the Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access field and n 2 in the Number digits to expect after lead field in Figure 6 2 This means that when a telephone user overdials using the short number access method three overdial digits will be required starting with 4 Overdialing 420 would reach the mobile unit defined in Figure 6 30 The telephone user would hear the Welcome prompt and then overdial 420 The Model 827 would see the leading 4 and know that short number access was being used with two more digits to follow Once the Model 827 received the 20 it would search the Direct Dial Number field for fleets groups and units until a match was found with TEST UNIT defined in Figure 6 30 Notice that the Unit Number and the Direct Dial Number are both 20 in this example this is convenient but not necessary At this point the Model 827 would request a traffic channel to set up the call General Class of Service General Class of Service is selected from the General Class of Service tables that have already been defined under COS
87. the rest of Model 827s will receive information on the data buses incorporated into the PCM Cable A communication link to a Model 827 can be made one of three ways 1 Local RS 232 Link using an RS 232 cable from a COM port on the PC to the RS 232 port on the front panel of the Model 827 2 Remote modem connection using the internal modem of on interconnected Model 827 3 Remote modem connection using a modem connected externally to the RS 232 port on the front panel of the Model 827 Local RS 232 Link You can connect your computer to the Model 827 with a local RS 232 cable say no longer than 50 feet This method is useful either in the shop for initial setup of the Model 827 or during site visits with a portable PC You use a cable connecting the COM port on your computer and the Model 827 front panel RS 232 port with the pin outs shown in Figure 5 1 DB9 DB25 DB9 DB9 Male Female Male Female Model 827 Computer Model 827 Computer 1 1 1 2 3 RX Data 2 TX Data 2 RX Data 3 RX Data 2 TX Data 3 Data M 3 TX Data 4 20 DTR 4 4 DTR b Ground 7 Ground 5 Ground 5 Ground 6 6 6 7 CTS 4 RTS 7 CTS 7 RTS 8 RTS b CTS 8 RTS 8 CTS 9 9 9 Figure 5 1 Local RS 232 Programming Cable To set up a local RS 232 link between a PC and the Model 827 follow these steps 1 If the COM port on your com
88. them if a Model 827 s storage area is full it can pass records to another Model 827 that has space remaining If space is available registration and status records are stored on the control channel interconnect calls are stored on the Model 827 that contains the telephone interface used for the call and mobile to mobile calls are stored on the Model 827 that has been assigned as the traffic channel for the call NOTE The M827BASE program knows when all the Call Detail Records have been successfully retrieved from a Model 827 At that point M827BASE tells the Model 827 to clear its CDR Memory If M827BASE fails to retrieve ALL of the Call Detail Records for any reason it WILL NOT tell the Model 827 to clear its CDR Memory Any Call Detail Records that are partially retrieved from the Model 827 will be stored in a file on the PC This file is named CH MMDD T where MMDD and are the same as the description for the complete billing files Table A 1 shows the format of each field in the Call Detail Record Note that Num and Hex fields are right justified and zero filled Char fields are left justified 1 Appendix A Call Detail Files Table 1 Call Detail Record Fields Field Name FieldName Length Description Length Description Record Type Identifies the type of call Basic call types are listed below 0 Registration 1 Status 2 Mobile to Mobile 3 Short Data SDM2 80 Mobile t
89. this point press the ENTER key on the key board This tells M827BASE to tell the PC modem to dial the overdial digits the digits after the semicolon When the Model 827 receives the overdial digits it will start the modem handshake If the modem handshake is successful you will see the Telco Monitor screen come up 5 9 Section 5 Getting Started NOTE If this does not work and you are sure that your cabling DIP switches both speed and mode telephone number modem access digits COM port selections are correct then verify that the interrupt jumpers for the COM port in your PC are set right IRQ4 for COMI or IRQ3 for COM2 10 Now you can access any of the M827BASE menu items that require a communication link with the Model 827 site Remote External Modem Link If you do not have the interconnect option installed in your Model 827 or you want greater than 2400 bps modem capability you can connect a Hayes compatible modem to the Model 827 front panel RS 232 connector The external modem link is illustrated in Figure 5 6 The Model 827 periodically issues Hayes AT commands to see if an external modem is present and to set its configuration Hayes Modem Serial COM Port Serial COM Port PSTN PC running M827BASE Serial COM Port Hayes Modem RS 232 Port Model 827 Figure 5 6 Remote Data Link to Model 827 External Modem To set up a remote external modem link follow these steps 1 Set the baud
90. through its interconnect telephone port and access all of Comm Submenu operations without a dedicated telephone line and external modem on the Model 827 Figure 5 3 illustrates the internal modem link 5 5 Section 5 Getting Started Hayes Modem Serial COM Port 4 9 Serial COM Port PC running M827BASE Model 827 Figure 5 3 Remote Data link to Model 827 Internal Modem NOTE The baud rate setting for the internal modem is set by DIP switches just as it is for the local RS 232 link Refer to Table 5 1 for the appropriate DIP switch settings A dip switch setting of 2400 bps or greater will result in a modem connection of 2400 bps The final result is that you need not worry about the DIP switch settings for the internal modem baud rate unless you want to use a baud rate of 300 or 1200 bps For the internal modem to connect at these slower baud rates the dip switches MUST be set specifically for those baud rates To set up a remote internal modem link follow these steps 1 In M827BASE you must set up the Modem access number field located in the data window for the Site Configuration of the site you would like to remotely communicate with The number of digits you enter in this field must match the number of digits entered in the Number digits to expect after lead field located in the Call Parms pop up window accessible lower down on the Site Configuration data window If you are using overdial ac
91. to access the Password Entry screen while in supervisor mode and tell you what your password is However if you are the system administrator and forget the password for Level 4 contact Zetron 5 36 o LSXSIEMOPROGRAMM NUNG tee sk e aes IUUD Arbo pent 6 1 DATABASE OVERVIEW 6 1 SITE CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING eene 6 2 Site IN UNS DE Se Rote Le 6 3 Programming ACCESS iis tae e 6 3 Set M827 Time from PC 1000 nie tne 6 3 Modem Access Num Betis uo e deem ed tees 6 4 Repeater Jammed Reset d 6 4 Emergency Calls Demand Resources 6 4 Call Time ese pus nd NO EUER 6 4 Report Alarms RAO ace eas E Ns 6 4 Repeat Ail AERE ees bo natant cast 6 5 dne 6 5 Call Pardmielebs 6 5 E amp M Number to Access Overdial 6 6 Disconnect on Call Progress Tone iets cates socius wench cq oii ed vede s 6 6 Minimum Speech PSTN Call Length to 6 6 Store Call Detail dieses Si eant t e Ede e RUP CE dpud edge 6 6 Lead Digit to Designate Direct Dial Access
92. to the site corresponding to the indicated authorization code and select COMM OTHER AUTHORIZE ENABLE MULTISITE Enter the 8 digit key code provided by Zetron Once the site has received and verified this code the site will be enabled for multi site operation After the multi site option has been loaded into the site a soft reset must be performed This can be done by selecting COMM OTHER RESET UNIT SOFT 4 3 S GETTINGSTARTE D qe doo Fir ode qub deest tee koe tre Qe IDs epo dog 5 1 INTRODUCTION 5 1 INSTALLATION 5 1 Office PC Reguirements sd eR LE 5 1 First Time Installation 11 2 uates 5 1 Upgrade Installation sie tt tr eden ky ak eisiea 5 2 Separate Billing File E mato Mddk 5 2 COMMUNICATION LINK TO MODEL 827 eere 5 3 Local RS 232 LIDE aio daos a acie vo dta Ye doct 5 3 Remote Internal Modem 5 5 Remote External Modem 5 10 Multi site programming using Intersite 5 14 GETTING STARTDBELD72 5 oe diia 5 14 Runne the Softwar 5 14 Keyboard Commands misse erie iea E E ag ca tase wa 5 14 Maii Menu Screen uses ee diese a ege x Vin eee 5 16 Edit Menu Sel cttons s eoe e teet 5 17 Index WindO
93. tone sequences that are sent back and forth E COUNTRY DATA SUPERVISOR mode INDEX COUNTRY FILE untry Comments Country UK A Pulse On Time 035 Off Time 065 Interdigit Time 800 DTMF On Time 080 Off Time 080 Regenerated DTMF Level 12 Wink Parameters Min Wink Time 06 Wink Completion Time 2 00 Wink Duration 24 MF R2 MF ELP Edi Incoming ter the number of digits to be Digits in Called Num 00 ceived in the Called Number 0 20 Dia Req Calling Num N ter 0 if unknown Dig Digits in Calling Num Com Outgoing Group II Category Send 01 Calling Num will be Req N Calling Num to Send Figure 6 12 Country Data MFR2 Window 6 22 Section 6 System Programming Digits in Called Number Digits in Called Num is the number of digits the PSTN is sending to indicate the destination number dialed This field is not necessary but knowing how many digits to expect eliminates one transmit and receive tone sequence Required Calling Number Req Calling Num determines whether the Model 827 should request that the PSTN send the Caller ID the telephone number where the call originated It is not necessary to request the Caller ID but it can be useful to know where a call originated from in the Call Detail Record Digits in Calling Number Digits in Calling Num is only useful if the Req Calling Num field is set to This field is not necessary but knowing how many digits to expect will el
94. when DTMF or MF digits are received from the telephone port The Model 827 back panel contains five connectors The PCM DATA Bus connector is a 24 pin Centronics type connector This connection provides both the PCM audio and serial data bus connections between individual Model 827s in a system The CONTROL SENSE is a 10 pin connector and provides the alarm sense inputs and control outputs as well as the cross busy sense and control The REPEATER connector is 12 pins and provides the required transmitter and receiver connections The TELEPHONE connector is an 8 pin RJ45 modular plug for connection to the PSTN or a PBX when the telephone option is installed in a Model 827 CONTROL CHANNEL OPERATION In an MPT1327 compatible system call setup user validation and the allocation of available resources are done by a channel which has been designated as the control channel The Model 827 provides control channel operation that is configurable on a site wide basis as fixed cyclic or cross busied and additionally as dedicated the control channel cannot be used as traffic or non dedicated the control channel may be assigned for traffic if necessary Each unit at a site can individually be designated as a control channel traffic channel or both On initial power up the system chooses the lowest numbered unit that is available and designated for control channel only or control and traffic channel operation to operate as the control channel for t
95. window Use the left or right arrow keys to select a particular index field to sort on Use the up or down arrow keys to move backwards of forwards in the data file Use the PgUp of PgDn keys to jump 9 data records at a time Press the Return Enter key to move to the data window on the right side of the screen Now your keystrokes are directed to moving around the data fields Press the Esc key to move back to the index screen The index window will also appear when a Comm submenu item has been activated if more than one site has been programmed This is because a connection to a site can not be initiated without knowing which site you are interested in communicating with COMM Menu Selections Activating one of these menu items allows you to communicate with your Model 827 sites for e updating database information e retrieving billing statistics and status information monitoring in real time e setting audio levels for both the repeater interface and the telephone interface See Figure 5 9 If more than one site exists you will be asked to select the site to which you wish to connect When a site has been selected M827BASE will automatically connect to the Model 827 site using the method set up in the Site Configuration under the Programming Access pop up window At this point the STATUS window will be visible in the lower right corner displaying information about the connect procedure Once the connection has been made the scree
96. 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Idle 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Busy 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Total Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Clearing Down Calls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Messages Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time RX Jammed 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Cross Busied 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Inbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Outbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Outbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 B 11 Appendix B Statistics Files ee ok ok ask ask ok Yesterday s Statistics for Unit 3 Time of Day CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed XBusy Slots Txed Frames Txed Withdrawn Slots Good Responses Bit Errors Bit Pair Errors Not Decodable w SYNC Empty Slots Message Not Allowed Invalid Message Rx Out of Slot Successful Registrations Registration Attempts Successful Status Calls Status Call Attempts Successful SDM2 Calls
97. 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Empty Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 03312 00000 Message Not Allowed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Invalid Message 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Rx Out of Slot 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Registrations 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Registration Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Status Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Status Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful SDM2 Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 SDM2 Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Simple Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Simple Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Emer Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Emer Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 10secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 30secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 60secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Canceled by Orig 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Unavailable 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Busy 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Timed Out 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Acti
98. 000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 9PM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 10PM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 11PM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 Appendix B Statistics Files System Loading Sample Today s Traffic Loading Site 001 Hours 00 00 11 45 PC Time 05 30 00 15 06 42 Time 1 40 80 00 00 00 15 00 30 00 45 01 00 01
99. 000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Timed Out 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Active as Control Channel 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call 35 52 24 08 12 24 01 48 00 00 00 00 Time Idle 24 08 35 52 47 36 58 12 00 00 00 00 Time Busy 35 52 24 08 12 24 01 48 00 00 00 00 Total Calls 00086 00041 00014 00003 00000 00000 Time Clearing Down Calls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Messages Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time RX Jammed 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Cross Busied 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Inbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Outbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Outbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 B 6 Appendix B Statistics Files ET 5 Statistics for Unit 3 Time of Day 12PM 1PM 2PM 3PM 4PM 5PM CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 03313 00000 XBusy Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Frames Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00829 00000 Withdrawn Slots 000
100. 00020 Classes of Service General 01 Roaming 01 HELP Enter a name which uniquely identifies Use Autodial Table Y Table Num 0001 this unit Rate Code Comments Create Date 01 24 96 Alter Date record saved Figure 6 30 Required Units Fields Member of Fleet The Mem of Fleet is the M827BASE unique Fleet Number assigned to each fleet defined in M827BASE This field must be filled in from a pop up selection window that lets you select one of the already defined Fleets This is how M827BASE keeps track of which units belong to which fleets Unit Number The Unit Number is the MPT1343 Unit Number assigned to this unit This number must be in the range 20 to 89 or 200 to 899 according to the definition of the Fleet that this unit is a member of Priority The Priority field determines a unit s priority when allocating resources when queuing is enabled please see Call Queuing in Section 3 This field is also used in conjunction with the Priority column in the Schedule Table see Figure 6 3 on page 6 7 to limit certain user s privileges during peek hours 6 51 Section 6 System Programming Direct Dial Number The Direct Dial Number can be used to map either overdial digits or feed digits to a radio unit Both of these mappings can be accomplished at the same time if programming is done properly For an example of how feed digits would be mapped to a radio unit please refer to the explanation of
101. 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Empty Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Message Not Allowed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Invalid Message 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Rx Out of Slot 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Registrations 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Registration Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Status Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Status Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful SDM2 Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 SDM2 Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Simple Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Simple Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Emer Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Emer Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 10secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 30secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued gt 60secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Canceled by Orig 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Unavailable 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Busy 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Timed Out 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Active as Control Channel 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS
102. 2 Contents continued IIE MIQUE mannaa angen ced ss Mofes tds c asd ie 6 22 Digits in Called Number 6 23 Required Calling 6 23 Digits in Calling 2 saeco gee cage uous 6 23 Group I Category Send Ute avenae e 6 23 Calling Number Required 6 23 Calling Number to rene tn etae UR Reels 6 23 Cadence Tab C 6 23 Fa c 6 24 Busy and Reorder Types uuo s etico ea SUDAN Re De BORRAR 6 24 Dial Click Detect test tee tn rte e t 6 24 Disita Hybrid od eee 6 25 NEILWORKPROGRAMMING bete ORIS odas 6 25 Connected Site eT 6 25 6 25 CIIM 6 26 eens 6 26 USITAS EN 6 26 REPEATER PROGRAMMING aee ste Paesi e d desta doped 6 26 dey ua a ccna 6 27 RE Losical Channel INU MIDST S iR hae ae 6 27 Use Chanel ostentare unt 6 27 Gross TRUS e UE 6 27 Cross Busy EO 6 28 Target Frames ie a 6 28 Send MARK Message in Burst in Control Channel Mode 6 28 Interbutst Periods iecore RU AR aede ea POM EURUN DN RS 6 2
103. 4 21 Telephone 4 23 End to End or 2 Wire E amp M 4 24 LC Mc 4 25 MOX Threshold and Decay DR 4 25 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING oct ttu vene ri Ned VR ot pp UU 4 26 FINAL CHECKS BEFORE LEAVING THE SITE 4 26 OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS e td ese dedos od e mes 4 27 TN CASE OF DIFFICULTY pa 4 27 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE NOTES win dide UN 4 28 INSTALLING NEW BPROM S TNR 4 29 FLASH MEMORY SOFTWARE 2 2222221 4 30 Contents continued Using flash memory 4 30 Configuring flash memory 4 30 ENABLING YOUR SYSTEM FOR MULTISITE OPERATION 4 31 5 GETEING STARTE D eR tb itu native a 5 1 INTRODUCTION deny eR P aT 5 1 INSTALLATION 5 1 Office PC Requirelbenls Dead aU 5 First Time Installation 5 1 Uperade InstalldtlODa pe S 5 2 separate Billing Pile Directory eie n ee Seu IS RAPESEN 5 2 COMMUNICATION LINK TO MODEL 827 5 3 Local 2 tte E eta eigene
104. 4AM 5AM CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 XBusy Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Frames Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Withdrawn Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Empty Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Message Not Allowed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Invalid Message 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Rx Out of Slot 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Registrations 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Registration Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Status Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Status Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful SDM2 Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 SDM2 Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Simple Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Simple Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Emer Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Emer Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued 10secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued 30secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued 60secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Canceled by Orig 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Cal
105. 5 Site Site Name Countr 7 001 LOCAL SITE UK 9 002 NEAR SITE UK 11 003 FAR SITE UK HELP Select item with arrow keys and Link press ENTER RETURN Roami Esc key exits Del key deletes field and exits Figure 6 39 Roaming Class of Service Each Roaming COS consists of the following fields Roam COS Number The unique number assigned to this Roaming Class of Service Roam COS Name The name assigned to this Roaming Class of Service This field is optional but is useful for sorting and record keeping Site Up to twelve pre defined Model 827 sites to include in this Roaming Class of Service Dial Plan A pre defined Dial Plan for each pre defined Model 827 site to be used when a unit accesses this Model 827 site for outgoing interconnect calls Toll COS A pre defined Toll Restrict Class of Service for each pre defined Model 827 site to be used when a unit accesses this Model 827 site for outgoing interconnect calls 6 67 Section 6 System Programming Link to another Roaming COS If all twelve Sites in the Roaming COS are full and more Sites are needed press ENTER and a window will pop up to allow another Roaming COS to be linked or appended onto the end of the current Roaming COS The maximum number of Sites in a Roam COS would be 384 if all 32 possible Roaming Classes of Service were linked together to form a single Roaming Class of Service having 384 Sites The trade off is the decreas
106. 6 33 Call Processing Sequence Mobile Land Call A mobile unit initiates a request for a PSTN interconnect call at Model 827 Site Number 1 The Model 8279 on the control channel receives the request for an outbound PSTN call The Model 827 looks up the unit in the database gets the General COS assigned to that unit and validates the unit for the type of call requested If the unit is valid for outgoing PSTN calls the Model 827 tells the unit to send the packet with the PSTN destination The Model 827 allows or restricts the call according to the Toll Restrict COS assigned to the unit and the PSTN destination The Toll Restrict COS to use at this site is determined by looking in the Roam COS assigned to this unit The General COS Roam COS and Toll Restrict COS databases are pictured in Figure 6 33 Once the outgoing PSTN call is allowed the Model 827 then proceeds to determine the best way to reach the PSTN destination The first step is to compare the PSTN destination against the correct Dial The Dial Plan is determined by looking in the Roam COS assigned to this unit and getting the Dial Plan associated with Model 827 Site Number 1 Now the Model 827 will compare the PSTN destination against the individual Digit Plans in the Dial Plan until it finds a match When match is found the Model 827 knows which Route to use in the Least Cost Route table The Least Cost Route tells the Model 827 where to start looking for an a
107. 6 40 Briable Disconnects sostener e EUER E 6 41 Interargit 2 t a eater 6 41 Ine Connects 10 eon vested RR Nn ve tee Rn 6 41 jiu deii ode v MCA cC E 6 41 GENERAL CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING eee 6 41 AlloWanCes istituti e evite eer conma verter 6 42 Fixed Call eter eet erede eat 6 42 Data Call Limit secet terrae bn P eee 6 43 F ll Off A r Call Setup D hae 6 43 No AnsWwer Dime Outs a s ee ete ire ee oe ef de 6 43 Pre det acl S 6 43 Pull eee qtiae 6 43 Allow erc ae revers 6 43 EGG BC c RENE 6 43 Same eode 6 44 Calls mte te E E 6 45 SDM2 Paraimetets e ttis eter DRE 6 46 Call Diversion 5 ener nnne 6 47 FLEETS PROGRAMMING vet end iode 6 47 Index ie ere teer reete teeth e 6 48 Numibers ssz i 6 48 Horde i RIMIS etin UNS 6 48 RE 6 48 Direct Dial Number S 6 49 Fleet Group aea a iei es 6 49 enun uns 6 49 Fleet Individual Number eese 6 49 Last I
108. 8 Play Station uiui ttes tits ied 6 28 nicer MM PME 6 28 Call 6 28 SAI BP WN 6 28 Receiver Timer cu aodio secu pea rM ees 6 28 Receive and Transmit baia asa ptu E 6 29 Prep TEE 6 29 Sense TAETES o 6 29 TEIG orate tutte ed n d LE 6 30 DEDOUEDUE dio adeat dit au IM ND 6 30 uos Dto eU A asa stes fup 6 30 APO a sete icu MEM E i 6 30 Check on PET Only ue diea pets 6 30 Disable 6 30 Range P E 6 30 Status to Transmit to Radio 6 31 Tnntertial A S 6 31 Contents continued Cal boe estando toan 6 32 Subscriber and Repeater Bus Fault 6 32 TELCO PORTS PROGRAMMING neierens n NE COPIA 6 32 e 6 33 Eine M 6 33 End is ete Biene D deliciis 6 33 E amp M tmd nans 6 36 Auto Balance Hybrids eiui iier 6 39 Enable Voice Prompts 6 40 ANW Call Svcs fete eda tein is 6 40 Incoming Call Mode istituti rate e do eet eee
109. ASE and the Model 827s this gives you extra protection against any computer except your authorized one accessing your Model 8275s If for some reason the passwords get out of sync from one another the M827BASE copy of the password can be changed independently from the 5 26 Section 5 Getting Started Model 827 by using the OTHER CHANGE DATABASE MANAGER PASSWORD selection from the Main menu bar The passwords could be out of sync because M827BASE resides on two separate computers that need to connect to the same Model 827 site The password at the Model 827 site gets set from one computer The other computer will not be able to connect until the password is updated in M827BASE using the OTHER CHANGE DATABASE MANAGER PASSWORD option The Modem string option allows modem initialization string in the Model 827s to be changed This initialization string is used by the Model 827 to initialize an external modem attached to the front panel of the Model 827 Clear Submenu The Clear submenu contains three options The Call detail option clears all of the billing data stored in all of the Model 827s at the selected site This option erases the call detail memory in the Model 827s regardless of whether the billing data has been retrieved from the Model 827s The Alarms option allows all currently triggered alarms to be cleared as well as all actions related to the alarm to be cleared from all Model 827s at the selected site If the alarm conditi
110. COS 6 56 6 58 6 59 dialplan 6 67 link to another 6 68 name 6 67 number 6 67 programming 6 66 site 6 67 toll restrict COS 6 67 S same fleet calls 6 44 sample statistics file B 4 SDM1 3 12 SDM2 3 12 privileges 6 46 retrys 6 16 security code check 3 5 selective clear enable 6 19 sense alarm auto clear 6 30 check on PTT only 6 30 disable repeater 6 30 enable 6 30 report 6 30 set output 6 30 status to transmit 6 31 valid range 6 30 sense alarms 6 29 sense input 4 See cross busy operation serial port 6 25 set time 5 26 6 4 setup maints nunber sent 6 20 SIL 6 13 enable 6 19 site configuration call limit and aloha frame schedule table 6 7 country 6 5 disconnect on progress tone 6 6 E amp M number to access overdial prompt 6 6 emergency call limit 6 4 emergency calls demand resources 6 4 lead digit to designate direct dial access 6 6 minimum speech PSTN call length to store 6 6 modem access number 6 4 number of digits to expect after lead 6 6 programming 6 2 programming access 6 3 1 6 repeat alarm 6 5 repeater jammed reset time 6 4 report alarms to radio 6 4 set M827 time from PC time 6 4 site number 6 3 store call detail records 6 6 use advanced dial plan 6 7 site number 6 3 slotted aloha protocol 3 5 specifications 2 or 4 wire private circuit 2 2 accounting 2 3 alarm inputs 2 4 alarm outputs 2 4 data retention 2 4 end to end telephone 2 2 intersite li
111. Call Time Limit The Emerg call time limit field should be at least as long as the emergency call time limit programmed into the radio units This time limit can not be sent over the air to the radio units so it works best if the Model 827 does not have a call limit shorter than the radio units Report Alarms to Radio The Report Alarms to Radio field allows alarms both sense alarms see page 6 29 and internal alarms see page 6 31 to be reported to a Radio Entering a Y in this field will pop up a window to enter the destination radio The destination radio must already be defined under UNITS UNITS When an alarm is reported to a radio the radio will receive a Status Message 6 4 Section 6 System Programming Note If the Alarm Reporting feature of the Model 827 is not being used this field should be set to is entered and no radio unit is selected the user will be unable to exit the Site Config data window Repeat Alarm The Repeat alarm field specifies how many times the same alarm will be reported and the Interval field specifies how seconds between repeat alarm reports The system operator may wish to have an alarm reported more than once in case the alarm report radio is unattended Country The Country field must have a pre defined country selected from the Country data This Automatically sets many telephone parameters for the specific country Call Parameters This pop up window contains inte
112. DARD CLASS Allow Incoming from Phone N Allow to Phone Outgoing Y Emergency Y Autodial N Use Fixed Speech Call Limit N Use Fixed Phone Call Limit N Data Call Time Limit 05 00 Use Full Off Air Call Setup for HELP Individual Calls Y Phone N Enter Y to edit Same Fleet data No Answer Timeout 15 Full Duplex N Allow All Call Y Allow Intersite N Edit Calls Same fleet N Inter fleet N Edit SDM2 N Divert N CENE Figure 6 23 Required General COS Fields Allowances A unit s telephone privileges are set in the following fields Allow Incoming from Phone Allow Outgoing to Phone Allow Emergency to Phone and Allow Autodial If the Allow Autodial field is set to the Allow Outgoing to Phone field must also be set to Y and a unit must be assigned an Autodial Table in the unit record before an autodial call can be completed Use Fixed Call Limits The Use Fixed Speech Call Limit and Use Fixed Phone Call Limit fields select if a fixed call limit should be used for units assigned this Class of Service or if the time limit designated in the Call Limit and Aloha Frame Schedule Table see page 7 should be used If a fixed call limit is selected a pop up window will appear in which to enter the desired limit in minutes and seconds If 0 00 or a blank field is entered the call will have an infinite call duration timer 6 42 Section 6 Syst
113. ERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 RP Chan Unit Number 01 01 1000 RF Logical Channel Number 1000 Use Channel As B Cross Busy Y 24 Play BUSY Keyup Cross Busy Wait Time 0000 RX Ja Target Frames per Burst 15 Send MARK messages in burst Recei in control channel mode Y Trans Interburst Period 01 0 Enabl HELP Enter the time period after cross busy Edit Sense Alarms Y before resumption of operation Edit Internal Alarms Y 0 30000 ms _ Figure 6 16 Repeater Cross Busy Window 6 27 Section 6 System Programming This window sets fields that relate to the cross busy feature of the Model 827 Refer to Cross Busy Operation in Section 3 for details Cross Busy Wait Time The Cross Busy Wait Time sets the time to wait after a Model 827 has been in the cross busy state before the channel is again available for normal operation A Model 827 that is operating in the cross busy mode and is a control channel will operate the control channel in a burst mode The following parameters are related to this burst mode Target Frames per Burst The Target Frames per Burst field sets the target number of frames per burst that will be sent by a Model 827 operating in control mode Send MARK Message in Burst in Control Channel Mode This field indicates if a MARK should be sent in each burst Interburst Period The Interburst Period field sets the time between transmitting bursts of control
114. FIGURATION 2 2 6 12 secet E DUM EE 6 12 Contents continued System Iden e coss nitas iotas mls te bio 6 12 Network Operator e ern 6 13 Zone Area Free SIL Field Lengths 6 13 Zone Data e oou ae qid dec ae 6 13 LAB Sub tield i iisque USD EU EE EHE EK 6 13 MPT1327 Configuration 6 13 Dynamic Call Limit 105 6 14 Traffic Telco Queue Full ete reris 6 14 Call Limit Reduction 6 14 MPT1327 Parameters eed RO UM A 6 15 TimeOut 6 15 cohen neat 6 15 TP Fimeout ess Oe uen dii etit s aod 6 15 TW THM COU m 6 16 Number of Retries Availability Check esee 6 16 Number of Retries SDM2 Short Data 6 16 Trathic Channel Selects oni es E Mus 6 16 Group Call stood d addi dari Oe Do e Mr Td 6 16 Group Answer TimeOut sas 6 16 Group GTC RAD d UD 6 16
115. Hit ESC to quit Figure 5 12 Telco Monitor Status Info COMM I STATUS INFO retrieves status information from all Model 8275s at the selected site The retrieved information is stored in a file named STATTHHEINF where site number The status information is also displayed on the screen similar to the sample shown in Figure 5 13 5 22 COMM STATUS INFO M827 UNIT 1 SITI 827 Firmware Ver 2 Master DSP Ver 1 1 Section 5 Getting Started SUPERVISOR mode E 001 STATUS Unit Time Reported 30 June 2000 16 38 11 30 552 1 3 zb Radio DSP Ver 1 00 Telco DSP Ver 1 01 BUS Status Unit Type Slave Frame Sync Source Slave Lost F S Count 0 DIP Switch Settings On Reset Cows lopez 8 18 Units CCL Mode RS 232 Baud 9600 Telco End to End Loop DIP Switch Settings Right Now SW2 1 18 SW1 1 7 18 Unit 01 Mode RS 232 Baud 9600 Telco End to End Loop Channel Type Traffic Telco Installed PC connected to this unit Units on bus 01 05 Free local mem bytes 58903 Total CDR Records 547 CDR Mem Used 8 Alarms E Enabled D Disabled Sense 1 E Cur Value 5 0 Alarm Off Sense 2 E Cur Value 5 0 Alarm Off Sense 3 E Cur Value 5 0 Alarm Off CDR Mem E Alarm Off Subscriber Bus E Alarm Off Repeater Bus E Alarm Off Hit PGUP PGDN other units ESC to quit S
116. ITE UK HELP Select item with arrow keys and press ENTER RETURN Esc key exits Del key deletes field and exits Section 5 Getting Started SUPERVISOR mode SITE_CONFIG Site Number 001 Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access L Comm Port 1 Set M827 time fro LOCAL Modem access numb Local Connec Baud Rate 96 300 Repeater Jammed r 1200 2400 Emerg calls demand resources Y 4800 Emerg call time limit 05 00 9600 Alarms reported to N 19200 Repeat alarm 002 Internal 020 Country UK Edit Call Parms Y Schedule Y Prompts Y Networking Parms Y Diversion Parms Y Create Date 01 23 96 Alter Date Figure 5 2 Site Configuration Local Programming Window 4 With the Model 827 powered up select COMM CHANNEL MONITOR and you should get the channel monitor screen to come up If this works your local connection works NOTE If this does not work and you are sure that your cabling and COM port selection in M827BASE are correct then verify that the interrupt jumpers for your COM port in your PC are set properly IRQ4 for COMI or IRQ3 for COM2 5 Now you can program your Model 827 site with all of the database information using COMM UPDATE to send the site dependent and user information Remote Internal Modem Link If you have the interconnect option installed in your Model 827 it has up to 2400 bps modem capability You can call the Model 827
117. Interface Board 702 9758 Jumper Settings Jumper Description Settings Telephone Line Type A 4 Wire Connection Configuration B 2 Wire Connection Hybrid Balance Line Length A Near PSTN Connection Configuration B Far PSTN Connection Default settings are shown in bold text Table 4 3 Switch 1 Settings SW1 12345678 Configuration 2 Wire E amp M Immediate sip ELE Dome ema fofofo Endto Ena Loop stat 0 4Wire Eam Microwave wave systems on SIT 4 Wire E amp M Immediate Start for intersite leased lines 00000000 een Multi site Option Disable HT bl een Enable multi site if the option has been installed in at least 5 units at the site The label down position on the physical switches corresponds to a value of 0 Section 4 Installation 4 14 Table 4 4 Switch 2 Settings SW2 12345678 Configuration Repeater ID Number ime 2 11110101010 3 0101100 10 1 4 OE 5 6 PT T 0100110 101 T 8 E 11010111010 9 0 11 271110 0 E 11107110 0 01011 1 010 12 110111100 13 j 01111110 0 14 11111111010 15 6 1101010 110 7 E 01110101110 18 GOO i 120 11011101110 21 22
118. LEPHONE INTERFACE OPTION This appendix provides alternate figures and text details for Section 4 related to the Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option 950 0002 The essential difference between the UK telephone interface and the Canadian telephone interface is the assignment of the center four 4 pins on the RJ 45 connector J1 These pin differences can be observed by comparing Figure C 1 with Figure 4 3 The two small matrix boards control the telephone interface board 702 9758 connections to the correct J1 pins PSTN CONNECTIONS Figure C 1 below replaces Figure 4 3 on page 4 4 because different pins are used for the PSTN connections 8 76 5 4 3 2 1 J1 RJ45 Modular Connector 2 Wire 1 Not Used 5 PSTNB 2 Not Used 6 Not Used 3 Not Used 7 Not Used 4 PSTNA 8 Not Used 4 Wire 1 M Lead Return 5 4 Wire Receive 2 M Lead 6 4 Wire Transmit 3 4 Wire Transmit 7 E Lead 4 4 Wire Receive 8 E Lead Return Figure C 1 Canadian Telephone Cable Connector Pinout Figure C 2 replaces Figure 4 8 on page 4 9 because different pins are used for the 4 wire telco connections C 1 Appendix C Canadian Telephone Interface Option 702 9758 es 927 UK 4 WIRE INS TELEPHONE CABLE CEN LOGAN SN SYN 1 8 Pro fac 401 0105 DOUBLE ROW BARRIER CONN M RETURN BLUE M LEAD ORANGE 2 TRANSMIT HI BLACK RECEIVE LO 6 TRANSMIT LO YELLOW E LEAD B
119. ORTS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 TD Unit Number 03 01 02 MN Line Type M Disable Port N 03 MN 04 MN Auto Balance Hybrids N Enable Voice Prompts Y Allow Landline to Mobile Calls Y Allow Mobile to Landline Calls Y Enable Disconnect Y Interdigit Timeout 5 0 HELP Line Connects To I Select the type of intesite link in Trunk Group 02 LINK TYPE use Link Type 1 Enter 1 leased line no E amp M 2 leased line use E amp 3 microwave link no E amp M 4 microwave link use E amp M Figure 3 8 Telco Programming for Site 1 Unit 3 3 22 Section 3 Operation SITE TELCO PORTS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 TD Unit Number 04 01 N 02 N Line Type M Disable Port N 03 N 04 N Auto Balance Hybrids N 05 EN Enable Voice Prompts Y Allow Landline to Mobile Calls Y Allow Mobile to Landline Calls Y Enable Disconnect Y Interdigit Timeout 5 0 HELP Line Connects To I Select the type of intesite link in Trunk Group 03 LINK TYPE use Link Type 1 Enter 1 leased line no E amp M 2 leased line use E amp 3 microwave link no E amp M 4 microwave link use E amp M Figure 3 9 Telco Programming for Site 1 Unit 4 SITE TELCO PORTS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 TD Unit Number 05 01 N 02 N Line Type E Disable Port N 03 N 04 N Auto Balance Hybrids N 05 EN Enable Voice Pr
120. PABX will provide positive answer supervision Positive answer supervision means that the PSTN PABX will not supply signal on the E Lead until the called party answers The Model 827 monitors for the loss of signal on the E Lead to know when a call has disconnected When the PSTN PABX supplies positive answer supervision the Model 827 must know so that it waits until the called party answers before starting to look for disconnect by a loss of signal on the E Lead If positive answer supervision is supplied and this field 15 not set properly to Y the Model 827 will disconnect before the called party answers because it detects no signal on the E Lead Number of Feed Digits The Num of Feed Digits is the number of feed digits to expect from the PSTN PABX The feed digits are generally the last n number of digits dialed by the telephone user which the PSTN PABX passes to the Terminal Equipment to route the call to a specific destination within the Terminal Equipment The Model 827 can be programmed to take these feed digits and route the call to a specific mobile unit The feed digits are used in conjunction with the Base DID Adder and the low and high Range of DID Numbers to route incoming calls to the Direct Dial Number for Fleets Groups or Units Connect Time Required The Connect Time Required is the amount of time loop current must be present on the E Lead for the Model 827 to detect an incoming telephone call Start Supervision Seek Tim
121. ROWN 8 RETURN GRAY Figure C 2 Canadian 4 Wire Telephone Cable Installation TELEPHONE INTERFACE INSTALLATION The following sections describe other changes that apply only to the Canadian Telephone Interface Option Note Refer to Figure 4 7 page 4 8 and Table 4 2 page 4 13 for details End to End Trunks Insert 2 wire matrix plug 702 9945 into socket J2 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface Set the jumpers on 702 9758 as follows position B 2 wire JP2 position A Near PSTN connection C 2 Appendix C Canadian Telephone Interface Option 2 Wire E amp M Trunks Insert 4 wire matrix plug 702 9946 into socket J2 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface Set the jumpers on 702 9758 as follows position B 2 wire JP2 position A Near PSTN connection 4 Wire E amp M Trunks Insert 4 wire matrix plug 702 9946 into socket J2 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface Set the jumpers on 702 9758 as follows position A 4 wire JP2 position A Near PSTN connection INSTALLATION OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE INTERFACE Follow the steps below to install the Canadian Telephone Interface Option Part No 950 0002 Note Refer to Figures 4 1 4 5 4 7 4 10 as well as Table 4 2 NOTE The Model 827 telephone interface option is approved only for use with the Model 827 Trunking Controller supplied by Zetron Inc Use of th
122. Restore If you need to restore the database from backup diskettes onto the computer hard disk use the FILE RESTORE CONFIGURATION DATA operation M827BASE will give you precise instructions about when to insert your backup diskettes into the computer This operation will overwrite all database files currently in the M827BASE directory Make sure to insert the correct set of backups if you have more than one set and in the correct order Before you insert each backup diskette into the computer it is a good idea to write protect the diskette use a black label to cover the notch on 5 1 4 inch media open the switch in the corner of 3 1 2 inch media Follow the same procedure for restoring call detail information by using the FILE RESTORE CALL DETAIL operation Note that if there are any call detail files currently in the directory either the billing directory or the M827BASE directory with the same name i e the same date they will be overwritten 5 30 Section 5 Getting Started OTHER Menu Selections Figure 5 19 shows the Other menu selected These items are individually described below M827 Database Manager V2 30 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode Site COS Units Comm File otHer change PC modem parms change Database manager password create User fil Exit HELP Select item with arrow keys and ENTER or capital letter ESC to quit This option allows changes to be made to the
123. Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Frames Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Withdrawn Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Empty Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Message Not Allowed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Invalid Message 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Rx Out of Slot 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Registrations 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Registration Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Status Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Status Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful SDM2 Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 SDM2 Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Simple Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Simple Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Successful Emer Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Emer Call Attempts 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued 10secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued 30secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Queued 60secs 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Canceled by Orig 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Unavailable 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Busy 00000 00
124. UPERVISOR mode DE SITE 001 LCR Name EAST COSY E TABLE LOCAL TRUNKS LCR Number UNKS NO Program Name 01 LOCAL CALLS dis 2 34 4 95 6 7 8 HELP Select item with arrow keys and press ENTER RETURN Esc key exits Del key deletes field and exits Figure 6 37 Least Cost Routing Table Each Least Cost Route consists of the following fields LCR Number The unique number assigned to this route 6 63 Section 6 System Programming LCR Name The name associated with this route This field is optional but is useful for sorting and record keeping Please note that this name only exists in M827BASE Trunk Group Trunk to use to route the call Telephone lines are assigned or grouped in trunk groups under SITE TELCO PORTS for each telephone line at the Model 827 site OutDial Program Defines which OutDial Program to use on the specified trunk group The OutDial Program must be selected from the OutDial Programs that have already been defined under SITE OUTDIAL TABLE Dial Plan The Dial Plan Table set up the correspondence between the number dialed by a mobile unit and the Least Cost Route to use for placing the call Each of the Units defined in the system may be assigned different dialing plans via different Roam Classes of Service This may be desirable to grant some Units privileges to use a more cost effective route in order to real
125. ZETRON Model 827 MPT1327 Trunking Controller Operation and Installation Manual Part No 025 9339J Copyright 1996 2000 by Zetron Inc All Rights Reserved WARRANTY STATEMENT Zetron warrants that all equipment sold is free from defects in material and workmanship at the time of shipment The warranty extends one year from date of shipment and covers parts and labour Buyer must provide written notice to Zetron within the warranty period of any defect If the defect is not the result of improper use service maintenance or installation and if the equipment has not been otherwise damaged or modified after shipment Zetron or its authorized representative shall either replace or repair defective parts or replace the equipment or refund the purchase price at Zetron s option after return of such equipment by buyer to Zetron or its representative Shipment shall be paid for by the buyer No credit shall be allowed for work performed by the buyer Equipment found to be not defective shall be returned at buyer s expense and testing and handling expense shall be borne by the buyer Out of warranty repairs will be invoiced at the current Zetron hourly rate plus the cost of needed components LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Zetron makes no representation with respect to the contents of this document and or the contents performance and function of any accompanying software and specifically disclaims any warranties expressed or implied as to merchant
126. a called radio unit is busy when a status call is received the system operator may chose through the system programming to either have the status call queued or rejected RQC Request to Transmit Short Data Message Individual and group single prefix interprefix and system wide ALLI RQC calls are supported RQC calls addressed to the Model 827 a PABX or the PSTN are not supported Single Segment Transaction SST and Multiple Segment MST messages are both supported System programming allows Short Data Message records to a busy called unit to be either queued or rejected In addition the system programming allows calls to a group or system wide calls to be repeated RQT Request Call Diversion Self initiated and third party call diversion requests are supported Incoming speech calls or status calls can be diverted to another individual radio unit or to a group Speech calls can also be diverted to a PSTN or PABX extension The total number of diversions which can exist at any one time are dependent on the type of diversions which have been set up If all diversions are of the same type the following limits apply Radio to Radio Diversions 978 Radio to PABX Diversions 652 Radio to PSTN Diversions 326 If the types of diversions are mixed the following limits apply Radio to Radio Diversions 402 Radio to PABX Diversions 150 Radio to PSTN Diversions 117 3 12 Section 3 Operation A user s General Class of
127. a maximum inactivity time 6 19 voice 6 18 INDEX voice maximum inactivity time 6 18 call detail clear 5 27 retrieve billing 5 20 call detail record 3 27 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 6 call completion codes A 4 fields A 2 A 3 file A 1 format A 1 multi site records A 6 record types A 3 status field A 4 storage capacity 3 27 call diversion limits 3 12 call diversion privileges 6 47 call duration dynamic 3 7 speech 6 8 telephone 6 8 call limit and aloha frame schedule table 6 7 call queuing 3 7 allocation method 3 7 busy 6 12 repeater 6 12 telco 6 12 call sign 6 28 call type RQC request short data message 3 12 RQE request emergency call 3 12 RQQ request status transaction 3 12 RQS request include call 3 11 RQS request simple call 3 11 RQT request call diversion 3 12 abort transaction 3 13 calling number required 6 23 calling number to send 6 23 Canadian telephone interface option C 1 2 wire E amp M trunks C 3 4 wire E amp M trunks C 3 end to end trunks C 2 installation See Appendix C PSTN connections C 1 telephone interface installation C 2 tests and adjustments C 4 4 wire trunks C 5 end to end or 2 wire E amp M trunks C 4 capacities 2 3 change database manager password 5 31 Index pc modem parms 5 31 channel sharing See cross busy clear alarms 5 27 call detail 5 27 clear down number sent 6 20 connect time required 6 35 6 38 connected site 6 25 control cha
128. ability fitness for purpose sold description or quality Further Zetron reserves the right to revise this document or the accompanying software and to make changes in it from time to time without obligation to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes This document and any accompanying software are provided is Zetron shall not under any circumstances be responsible for any indirect special incidental or consequential damages or losses to the buyer or any third party arising out of or connected with the buyer s purchase and use of Zetron s products or services COPYRIGHT This publication is protected by copyright by Zetron Inc and all rights are reserved worldwide This publication may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior written consent from Zetron Inc The software in this product is protected by copyright by Zetron Inc and remains the property of Zetron Inc Reproduction duplication or disclosure is not permitted without prior written consent of Zetron Inc TRADEMARKS Zetron is a registered trademark of Zetron Inc All other product names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners INDUSTRY CANADA REGISTRATION NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain
129. ackage uses for accounting and billing invoices Please refer to Appendix A for more details on how this information is used Entering a in the Edit Additional Customer Info field will pop up the screen shown in Figure 6 29 6 49 Section 6 System Programming UNITS FLEETS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX FLEETS Num _ Fleet Name V Pfx Group Index Num 0001 0001 TRUCKING CO Y 200 2007 09 Fleet Name TRUCKING CO Home Site 001 Valid Y Number Prefix 200 CUSTOMER INFO Contact Addr City County Province Postal Code HELP Country Enter the name of the contact person for this customer Phone 4 Fax 4 Num of Units Rate Code Discount 5 Credit Lim Deposit Calls on Invoice S Interest Y Starting Date Figure 6 29 Fleets Customer Information Window UNITS PROGRAMMING The Unit information can be accessed by selecting UNITS UNITS Figure 6 30 shows the Unit data window with the fields highlighted that must be programmed For information on the fields not discussed below please refer to the on screen HELP for each field 6 50 Section 6 System Programming UNITS UNITS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX UNITS UNIT NAME FLT _U V DD Num Unit Name TEST UNIT TEST UNI 0001 020 Y 0000020 Mem of Fleet 0001 Unit Number 020 Prefix 200 Ident 0002 Manufac Code Model Serial 4 Check ESN N Priority 2 Valid Y Direct Dial Num 00
130. adio units to send a random access 6 7 Section 6 System Programming message This parameter indicates the number of time slots including the ALH message which constitute a frame and are available for access This number should be set larger for busy times of day and smaller for periods with light traffic Speech and PSTN Columns The Spch and PSTN columns set the time limits in minutes and seconds MM SS for speech and PSTN PABX calls respectively These limits apply during the specified time period unless the unit initiating the call has been assigned a fixed limit as part of their General Class of Service see GENERAL CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING on page 6 41 or the system Busy or Overload conditions have been meet see MPT1327 Configuration Queuing on page 6 13 Prompts This pop up window contains fields that select if tones or voice prompts should be used sets the compatibility mode for tones and allocates time for each voice prompt See TONE AND VOICE PROMPT PROGRAMMING on page 6 68 for more information on voice prompts Networking Parameters The Network window shown in Figure 6 4 contains the fields used to setup a multi site MPT1327 system SITE E CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDE SITE CONFIG SITE Site Name Country Site Number 001 001 CITY 1 UK Site Name SITE 1 00A1 002 CITY 2 UK Programming Access L Comm Port 1 003 CITY 3 UK Set M827 time from PC time Y 004 CITY 4 UK Mo
131. and hold the Shift Ctrl Alt key while you press the second key of the combination For example to do a Back tab press and hold Shift then press Tab The escape key lt Esc gt is your way to gracefully complete a task and exit Table 5 5 Key Functions Key Name Key Cap Index Window Data Window Return Enter E Move to data window Enter typed data into field and move to next data field Up Arrow Previous Record Previous data field Right Arrow Next index field Forward one character Back one index window Previous data record Page Down PgDn Forward one index Next data record window Insert Insert new data record Insert one character on ie Delete data record Delete one character T Tb 02 Next index field Enter default data and move to next data field Back Tab Shift Tab Previous index field Enter default data and move to previous data field ru Backspace Previous index field Back one character F1 to F10 F1 F10 F1 Guide to Fn keys Guide to Fn keys 5 15 Section 5 Getting Started Note To use the arrow keys on the numeric keypad make sure that the Num Lock key is off A GUIDE window can be toggled in and out of view by pressing the F1 key This GUIDE window describes which functions keys F1 to F10 are accessible at that time and their function Main Menu Screen The Main Menu is the first screen displayed after starting the M827BASE program If passwords have been set up you must enter your password
132. anual 025 9339 Upon successful completion of the setup procedure remove all cabling from the back of the Unit and install top cover and screws Re attach all cabling to the unit and apply power TELEPHONE INTERFACE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS The following sections describe how to adjust and test the Canadian Telephone Interface Option Part No 950 0002 End to End or 2 Wire E amp M Trunks 1 2 3 Follow step 1 in section 4 of the manual AUDIO LEVEL FROM PHONE Follow step 2 in section 4 of the manual AUDIO LEVEL TO PHONE To adjust the audio level to the phone establish a phone connection to the Model 827 and enter the COMM TELCO BALANCE LEVELS T Audio To Ph menu with the desired End to End or 2 Wire E amp M line selected Using a DVM monitor the differential voltage across the A and B lines from the PSTN Connect the two DVM leads between E1 and ES on board 702 9758 Telephone Interconnect near telephone connector J1 Press the appropriate level keys to adjust the telephone audio output gain to give a reading of 240 mVrms on the DVM Using an Oscilloscope take a differential reading on the same output and verify the signal is a sine wave Ca Appendix C Canadian Telephone Interface Option 4 Wire Trunks 1 AUDIO LEVEL FROM PHONE Follow step 1 in section 4 of the manual 2 AUDIO LEVEL TO PHONE To adjust the audio level to the phone establish a phone connection to the Model 827 and enter the COMM TELCO
133. ase Read Before Continuing The following step pertains to the on going operation of the Model 827 and may be useful in troubleshooting If jumper JP7 or JP10 is set to position and radio calls are not working reliably reduce the Radio In Gain It may be necessary to reduce Radio In Gain to 2 dBm 6 SQUELCH LEVEL If your Model 827 has been configured to use the internal COR circuit the squelch level must be adjusted for proper COR indication With no signal applied to the receiver enter the COMM REPEATER LEVELS Q Squelch Level menu with the desired unit selected and decrease the squelch gain until the COR LED comes on Then increase the Squelch Level until the LED just goes off This adjustment is just like the squelch control on a mobile radio 7 REPEAT AUDIO ADJUSTMENT The Repeat Audio path can be adjusted to match the receive and transmit audio levels With the service monitor in full duplex mode adjust the receiver audio level by supplying a full quieting signal to the receiver This signal should have a 1 KHz tone at 6096 of maximum deviation 1 53 kHz typical Next monitor the transmit channel deviation and adjust the radio repeat audio gain for the Model 827 Enter the COMM REPEATER LEVELS R Repeat Audio menu with the desired unit selected and press the appropriate level keys to match the transmit channel deviation to the receiver channel deviation receiver 1 53 kHz 1 53 kHz transmitter Telephone Hybri
134. ation message ALH to invite radio units to send random access messages The ALH message contains a parameter N that indicates the number of following timeslots which constitute a frame that are available for access The value for N can be set according to a time of day schedule programmed under the Schedule window of the Site Configuration This table allows the system operator to specify different frame lengths for different times of day Longer frame lengths can be set for busier times of day while shorter lengths can be used during light traffic periods Registration and Security Code Check When a radio unit initiates a call the control channel checks if the unit is currently registered If the unit is not registered the control channel will command the unit to send registration information The registration information is accepted if there is an entry in the site s database for the radio unit and that unit is valid The registration attempt will be rejected if no entry is found or the unit is considered invalid After the registration information has been accepted if the check ESN field is set for the calling radio unit the Model 827 will command the unit to send its security check data If the security data from the radio matches the data in the database the call is allowed to proceed and the radio unit is marked as registered in the database Every day at midnight the registration flags are cleared in the unit database therefore uni
135. ator on the screen if the indicator does not light adjust the threshold until the indicator lights VOX DECAY To adjust the VOX decay establish a telephone connection to one of the Model 827s at the site and enter the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELSI D Vox Decay 4 25 Section 4 Installation menu with the desired line selected Adjust the decay to set the desired amount of bridging to allow in between syllables and conversation gaps SYSTEM PROGRAMMING To complete the installation of a new Model 827 site a database specifying site repeater telco fleet unit and group information for the site must be created and uploaded using M827BASE see Section 6 In addition the time of day clocks in the Model 827s at a new installation must be set see Section 6 If a Model 827 is being installed into an already existing site the time of day and the currently programmed database at the site will be cloned to the new unit Information does however need to added to the database to specify the characteristics of the new channel FINAL CHECKS BEFORE LEAVING THE SITE 1 If you have main firmware version 2 00 or above and have purchased the Multi site option note that dip switch 5 on switch must be in the down position for the site to be enabled for multi site operation After powering up the system element 6 on the block LED should come on and remain on if the site has been enabled for multi site operation If the site is not enabl
136. atus message 5 Internal Alarms There are three alarm conditions that are internal to the Model 827 which can be programmed to cause an alarm condition to be reported to the alarm report radio with the programmed status Figure 6 18 shows the Internal Alarms window The alarm report radio is programmed on the Site Configuration screen Refer to Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 6 31 Section 6 System Programming SITE REPEATER SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 RP Chan Unit Number 01 01 1000 RF Logical Channel Number 1000 Use Channel As B Cross Busy N Play Station Id N Keyup Delay 0020 Rx Jammed Timer 120 Receive Delay 00 Transm INTERNAL ALARMS Enable Call Log Overflow HELP Enable Report Status 10 Enter Y to enable alarm if the Call Edit S Log buffer is about to overflow Edit I Subscriber Bus Fault Alarm Enable Report Status 11 Repeater Bus Fault Alarm In Enable Report Status 12 Figure 6 18 Repeater Internal Alarms Window Call Log Overflow The first internal alarm is the Call Log Overflow this alarm is triggered when the memory used for storing billing records reaches 90 full Subscriber and Repeater Bus Fault Alarms There are two data buses between the Model 8275 the repeater bus is used for call processing and the subscriber bus is used for passing larger amounts of data between Model
137. aud Rate The Serial Baud field on each line of the networking table sets the baud rate of the optional serial link This field is not used if the Serial field is blank or zero Trunk Group The Trk Grp field on each line of the networking table specifies the trunk group of the links to the site entered in the Site field Telco Intersite links are assigned to Trunk Groups in the Telco database See Trunk Group on page 6 41 for further details Queue Size The Queue Size field on each line of the networking table sets the number of queue entries to allow to the site specified in the Site field Diversion Parameters The Diversion Parameters window shown in Figure 6 5 contains information necessary to set up the divert on No Answer and Busy features in the Model 827 controller When a calling unit has already set up a diversion and then sends a pre defined status message to a pre defined target unit the controller will toggle the divert on no answer or busy toggle switch for the calling unit s diversion The controller will then send a pre defined status message back to the calling unit to notify it of the current position of the toggle switch it just toggled SITE SITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE CONFIG SITE Site Name Country Site Number 001 001 CITY Site Name CITY 1 002 CITY Programming Access L Comm Port 1 003 CITY Set M827 time from PC time Y 004 CITY Modem access number 0008888
138. ayed 6 72 Section 6 System Programming Note You must use a DTMF key to mark the end of a recorded message if the message is shorter than the allotted time This is especially important when dial click decoding is being used The Model 827 cannot detect dial clicks while any tones or voice prompts are playing The user must wait until the prompt is completed before they overdial any digits If there is unused silent time being played at the end of the prompt the telephone user has no way of knowing when to start overdialing from a rotary telephone Once in the voice prompt recording process you execute countless commands until either you enter or let the process time out without entering any keys Once you exit the process all the voice prompts you have recorded will be cloned to all the other Model 827 s at the site 6 73 Section 6 System Programming Tone Prompts The following tone prompts are given during the voice prompt recording process to guide you Two Ding Dongs You have gained access to the voice prompt recording process Four Quick High Pitched Beeps voice programming process is ready to receive a command Two Quick Low Pitched Beeps voice programming process received a command and is now ready for a two digit voice prompt number Six Beeps Begin recording a voice prompt Wait until the beeps have finished of course Eight Beeps The prompt entered is being erased One D
139. ber Prefix which must be in the range 200 to 327 Each fleet in the system must have a Number Prefix 6 48 Section 6 System Programming Direct Dial Number The Direct Dial Number is used to map feed digits and or short number access digits to a specific fleet For a description of this field and how this mapping is done please refer to UNITS PROGRAMMING on page 6 50 Once a fleet s Direct Dial Number has been dialed the user will be prompted to overdial the individual unit number or group number of the destination radio unit s Fleet Group Number The Fleet Grp is the Base Ident assigned to the block of identities used for group calls This number must be in the range 2001 to 6050 Last Group Number The Last Grp is the highest Group Number allowed for groups which are members of this Fleet The Last Group Number must be in the range 90 to 99 or 900 to 899 Fleet Individual Number The Fleet Indiv is the Base Ident assigned to the block of identities used for individual calls This number must be in the range 2001 to 6050 Last Individual Number The Last Indiv is the highest Fleet Individual Number allowed for unit which are members of this Fleet The Last Individual Number must be in the range 20 to 89 200 to 899 Fleet Customer Information for Billing This information is only required if a billing package such as Zebra is being used This information is used to make a user file which the billing p
140. bility check on the control channel or is not registered Confirmation not used Conversation Time out the call limit timer for this call has timed out System Busy no traffic channel or queue space is available for this call Disconnecting the call is being disconnected Alarm an alarm condition has been detected 6 75 Appendix A CALL uei od rete opone td mte erased tente caseo CALC DETAM FILE dete CALL DETAIL RECORD FORMA T USER FILE RECORD FORMA ep tete heen Appendix A CALL DETAIL FILES CALL DETAIL FILE Call detail information collected by the Model 8275 is retrieved and stored as ASCII files on your PC hard disk in a directory off the root named M827BILL If the M827BILL directory does not exist the records will be stored in the current directory In addition to the billing files a user file is also created whenever the billing is retrieved from a site CALL DETAIL RECORD FORMAT Billing data retrieved from each Model 827 at each site is contained in a separate file The files are named C MMDD D where site number MMDD current day month and the unit from which the records were retrieved Records are stored in the files in a fixed ASCII format described below Each line in the file represents one record Records are stored in each file in chronological order Although Model 827s generally store records for calls that took place on
141. can be entered UNITS AUTODIAL TABLE SUPERVISOR mode INDEX AUTODIAL Num_ Name AUTODIAL TABLE 0001 TABLE 1 0002 TABLE 2 Table Number 0001 Table Name TABLE 1 01 Number 8206363 02 Number 8882323 03 Number 5551212 04 Number 05 Number 06 Number 07 Number HELP 08 Number Edit press ENTER RETURN 09 Number 10 Number Guide Window F1 11 Number 12 Number Done Esc 13 Number 14 Number 15 Number Figure 6 32 Required Autodial Table Fields 6 55 Section 6 System Programming LEAST COST ROUTE PROGRAMMING The ability to examine the digits dialed and determine the most cost effective means of reaching the dialed destination can be a very useful feature If this feature is not desired it is a simple matter to either not program the necessary tables or remove programming information to turn it off Before programming any of the necessary database tables to set up least cost routing it might be helpful to understand the sequence of events that takes place when a mobile originated interconnect call is initiated using the least cost routing feature Routing Example Let s see what happens when a mobile unit initiates a PSTN call Figure 6 33 and Figure 6 34 illustrate the sequence of events The superscripts in this paragraph correspond to the circled numbers in Figure 6 34 COS Unit COS Plan Route Table Program Roam Figure
142. cess i e End to End lines with overdial then you also have a digit entered in the Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access field Note in Figure 5 4 that the Modem access number field does not include the leading digit entered in the Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access field 5 6 Section 5 Getting Started SITE SITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE CONFIG Site Site Name Country Site Number 001 001 LOCAL SITE UK Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access L Comm Port 1 Set M827 time from PC time Y Modem access number 0000088 Repeater Jammed reset time 02 CALLPARM E amp M Number to access overdial prompt 0000077 Disconnect on Call Progress tone Y HELP Min Call Length to store in CDR Enter lead digit to designate PSTN 020 Speech 020 direct dial access 0 4 9 Store Call Detail Records for Status Calls Y Registrations Y SDM2s Y Call Failures y Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access 4 Number digits to expect after lead 2 Figure 5 4 Site Configuration Modem Access Number 2 After the Modem access number has been set up now move to the Programming Access field on the Site Configuration data window and enter O for internal modem in originate mode A sample of the Originate Modem pop up window is shown in Figure 5 5 In the Phone field you must enter the telephone number for the telephone line conn
143. change lines as an extension to compatible PABXs which support MF DTMF signaling and to 2 and 4 wire private circuits This apparatus can be used on circuits which support MF DTMF signaling WARNING Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect or DTMF signaling only the performance of the DTMF signaling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment be set to user DTMF signaling for access to public or private emergency services DTMF signaling also provides faster call set up This apparatus has been approved for the use of the following facilities e MODEM Auto Answering Auto Clearing Auto Calling Signaling Any other usage will invalidate the approval of the apparatus if as a result it then ceases to conform to the standards against which approval was granted WARNING When programming Auto dial numbers the user must check and insure that all numbers are correctly programmed Ringer Equivalence Number REN The Model 827 telephone interface option has a Ringer Equivalence Number REN of 3 0 A single telephone line has a physical limit to the number of ringers that can be connected and still provide reliable operation Each type of apparatus will be marked with a REN value a typical BT provided telephone instrument has a REN of 1 0 unless otherwise marked The maximum REN value for a single line is 4 0 The
144. channel information Play Station ID Play Station Id tells the Model 827 if it should generate a Morse code station Id at a specified interval Interval The Interval sets the time in minutes between broadcasts of station Id Call Sign The call sign specifies station Id to be broadcast in Morse code at the specified interval The Morse code station Id is transmitted at twenty words per minute rate Keyup Delay The Keyup Delay tells the Model 827 how long to delay after keying up the transmitter until it starts transmitting data Receiver Jammed Timer When a repeater is in the idle state it watches COR to determine whether the repeater is jammed The RX Jammed Timer tells the Model 827 how long COR must be active while the repeater is idle before the repeater goes to the RX JAMMED state 6 28 Section 6 System Programming Receive and Transmit Delays Some transmitters and receivers may introduce an audio delay into the system This delay will have an effect on the timing of the FFSK data sent and received from the mobile radios A delay in bit times should be entered into the Receive Delay and Transmit Delay fields to compensate if the transmitter and or receiver being used with the Model 827 introduces a delay See Tests and Adjustments in Section 4 Enable Delay This field allows for base station transmitters which require a delay after power up before they are available for transmission The Enable Delay ca
145. ction and given a unique site number before any other site specific database information may be programmed MPT1327 Config allows all MPT1327 parameters to be programmed Parameters such as the system and network identity MPT1327 time outs call queuing traffic channel allocation methods traffic channel operation and error correction e The Network database defines the configuration of a Multi site system The information includes trunk group and serial link parameters for linking a Multi site system together e The Repeater database allows the specific repeater or channel information for each Model 827 at a site to be defined This information includes enabling a Model 827 unit for an active channel and allows the channel number to be assigned to the Model 827 e The Telco Ports database allows the telephone interconnect option to be activated for a specific Model 827 at the site once the interconnect hardware is installed All telephone line specific information is programmed here e The Dial Plan database is the first step in the dial out process This allows dialing strings to be programmed which are then compared against to determine if any least cost routing can be performed e The Least Cost Route database defines which trunk group and out dial method should be used for each possible route The OutDial Program defines how the digits dialed should actually be dialed out to the PSTN or a PABX This takes the digit strin
146. d balance and levels to and from the PSTN PABX are adjusted on a Model 827 by using M827BASE and selecting the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELS menu option When this option is selected a telco monitor screen will appear displaying all telco ports that are installed in the system and their line type By using the cursor keys highlight the telco line you would like to adjust and press ENTER The HYBRID BALANCE AND LEVEL SETTINGS menu will appear The highlighted options are available for selection in this mode Options are selected by entering the letter representing the option and hitting ENTER From any selected option the ENTER key will return to the menu and the ESC key will 4 23 Section 4 Installation return to the monitor screen allowing the selection of another telco line In the adjustment steps below the menu item to select from the HYBRID BALANCE AND LEVEL SETTINGS menu is shown in lower case letters as follows COMM TELCO BALANCE LEVELS B Balance where B Balance is the menu option to select End to End or 2 Wire E amp M For the Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option please use the 2 wire information in Appendix C in place of step 3 below 1 2 wire telephone connection to the Model 827 the audio hybrid must be balanced to ensure a high quality audio connection The Model 827 will need to place a call through the hybrid to a silence number This silence number may be either a PSTN quiet termination or a des
147. dem access number 0008888 Repeater Jammed reset time 02 Emerg Calls demand resources Y Emerg call time limit 00 00 Report Alarms to Radio Y Repeat alarm 001 Interval 010 HELP Country UK Enter Y if you wish incoming intersite Edit calls to be queued for busy mobile Call Parms Y Schedule Y NETWORK Queue Intersite Calls on Busy N Allow Secondary Registration N Intersite Queue Timeout 00 30 Edit Network Route Table Y Figure 6 4 Site Configuration Network Parameters 6 8 Section 6 System Programming Queue Intersite Calls on Busy A Y should be entered in the Queue Intersite Calls on Busy field if you wish incoming intersite calls to be queued for a busy mobile Queuing for a busy mobile takes place on the destination site a call will remain queued for the Intersite Queue Timeout Allow Secondary Registration A should be entered in the Allow Secondary Registration field if the mobile radios have been programmed for secondary registration Secondary registration sets up the home site to keep track of both a primary and secondary registration location for each mobile If the mobile is not found on their primary site the secondary location will also be checked The secondary registration site stays valid until the Secondary Registration Timeout expires The mobiles will not re register on a site until their own timeout occurs which preve
148. divert on no answer 6 11 unit name 6 11 DSP based base stations 6 29 dynamic call limit call limit reduction 6 14 thresholds 6 14 traffic telco queue full 6 14 E E amp M number to access overdial prompt 6 6 emergency call time limit 6 4 emergency calls demand resources 6 4 enable disconnect 6 41 enable delay 6 29 enable late entry 6 53 EPROM 021 4 30 EPROM U22 4 30 error correction control channel 6 17 traffic channel 6 17 file menu 5 29 backup 5 29 print 5 29 restore 5 30 final checks before leaving the site 4 27 flash memory software update 4 31 flash memory utility Index configuring 4 31 using 4 31 fleet customer information for billing 6 49 direct dial number 6 49 fleet number 6 48 group number 6 49 home site 6 48 index number 6 48 individual number 6 49 last group number 6 49 last individual number 6 49 number prefix 6 48 programming 6 47 fleet customer information for billing 6 49 fleet group number 3 10 fleet individual 3 10 fleet individual number 6 49 fleet number 6 48 FOACSU See full off air call setup front panel diagram 3 3 full duplex 6 43 full off air call setup 3 16 6 43 G general class of service 6 41 example 6 56 units 6 52 group call answer timeout 6 16 GTC repeat rate 6 16 pressel ident type 6 16 group II category to send 6 23 group number 6 53 groups allow incoming from phone 6 54 enable late entry 6 53 include these site
149. dual or group If mode 1 or 2 is selected then additional pop up windows will appear to select if you wish to call an individual or group and to select the individual or group to call 6 40 Section 6 System Programming Enable Disconnect If the Enable Disconnect field is set to the telephone party will be able to disconnect a call in progress by hitting the key entered in this field indicates that a 4 entered by the telephone party will have no effect Interdigit Timeout The Interdigit Time out is the maximum amount of time allowed between overdial digits If overdialing has not been completed yet and the next overdial digit is not received before this time out expires the Model 827 will disconnect the call Line Connects to The Line Connects To field determines whether the telco port is connected to the PSTN a PABX or is a direct Intersite link If X is entered a pop up window will appear to enter the ID of the PABX The PABX Id range is 0 3 the default of zero is used when only one PABX is connected to the system The other PABX Ids can be generated using five digit PABX dialing as specified in MPT1343 8 2 5 5 If is entered a pop up window will appear to enter the link type The available link types are as follows 1 Leased Line no E amp M 2 Leased Line use E amp M 3 Microwave Link no E amp M 4 Microwave Link use E amp M Trunk Group The Trunk Grou
150. e 6 23 6 24 Busy and Reorder dE 6 24 Siro bore METH 6 24 Digital Hybi 5 a tace ages od ed pae nee 6 25 NETWORK PROGRAMMING feret itis v eg eases eee 6 25 Comnected ec oss setae ta teas ere 6 25 Serial o eiua MIU cdd aoi Qu E M LR M 6 25 BAU CRs Ale Irc PE 6 26 Trunk Group E 6 26 Queue oc 6 26 REPEATER PROGRAMMING 56 6 26 6 27 RF Logical Channel 6 27 Use Channel 6 27 CrOSS BUS A 6 27 Cross Busy Wait Time tete hates 6 28 Target Frames per Burst seis eite secre inen Pe esee 6 28 Send MARK Message in Burst in Control Channel Mode 6 28 Interburst PO 6 28 Play Station ID 6 28 lr e e 6 28 Call S mu Ao oS 6 28 Keyup Delay rae E S LOK DLE ED ut 6 28 Receiver Jammed Ve asap pete eis ead sed 6 28 Receive and Transmit Delays a erit fet o tendo da Seats 6 29 Ba Die De M mE 6 29 Sense X Ems uo son Amm a eon EC 6 29 Enable dod Ne dee 6 30 ee otn de EROS todas es aia
151. e The Start Super Seek Time is the amount of time the Model 827 will look for dial tone on an outgoing telephone call This field is used when the Supervision Type Outgoing Calls is set to 6 38 Section 6 System Programming Delay Before Dialout The Delay before Dialout can be used to insert a delay before digits are actually dialed to the PSTN PABX on an outgoing call This would be used if the Supervision Type Outgoing Calls is set to but the PSTN PABX needs a little time from when it detects that the line has been seized until it is ready to receive digits Base DID Adder and Range of DID Numbers The Base DID Adder and the low and high Range of DID Numbers might best be explained using an example DID stands for Direct Inward Dial Suppose the local PSTN had E amp M lines available with 3 feed digits and for this installation a block of 100 DID numbers was reserved Let s say the local PSTN has 7 digit telephone number and the block of 100 DID numbers is the telephone numbers 3434500 through 3434599 This means that when a telephone user dials any number in that range the Model 827 will detect the incoming call and the PSTN will send 3 feed digits in the range 500 to 599 The Model 827 needs to take those 3 feed digits and map it to an individual mobile unit s Direct Dial Number For this example we ll use the 7 digit telephone number as the mobile unit s Direct Dial Number see UNITS PROGRAMMING
152. e Model 827 will send out an AHYX to the called radio unit to inform it that the call will not take place CROSS BUSY OPERATION The Cross Busy feature allows the Model 827 to share an existing repeater used for conventional radio operation The CNTRL 4 output is used to indicate to the co existing controller that the Model 827 is using the channel The SENSE 4 input is used by the Model 827 to determine if the repeater has been busied out or is available During site configuration each channel can be designated as being cross busied or not If a traffic channel 1s cross busied while the channel is idle the Model 827 will monitor the SENSE 4 input if that input goes below 3 volts the Model 827 will enter the cross busy state Any channel that is in the cross busy state is not available to be allocated as a traffic channel While the channel is in the cross busy state the Model 827 will continue to monitor the SENSE 4 input if the input goes above 3 volts for a programmable Cross Busy Wait Time the traffic channel will revert back to idle and will once again be available for traffic assignment Once a traffic channel has been assigned and becomes busy it will set its cross busy output CNTRL 4 low to indicate that the channel is in use If a control channel has been designated as a cross busy channel it will operate in burst mode The target number of frames to send per burst the time between bursts and if a MARK should be sent in each b
153. e following convention P D D D Where P programmed lead digit and D D is the assigned direct dial number for the user where n programmed number of digits to expect after the pre digit P The values for P and n are programmed under the Call Parms window in the Site Configuration 2 Direct dial access to the fleet base ident plus the 2 or 3 digit group or individual number P D D D NN Where P programmed lead digit D D D is the assigned direct dial number for the fleet and n 2 programmed number of digits to expect after the pre digit P NN N is the 2 or 3 digit assigned group or individual number of the radio being called After the lead digit and direct dial number for the fleet are entered and validated the calling party will hear either a voice or tone prompt indicating they should now overdial the group or individual number 3 Technicians access An eight digit dialed string for direct prefix and ident access The format of this string is as follows 1 PPP IIII Where 1 indicates technicians dialing mode PPP three digit assigned prefix and four digit ident 4 A 9 or 10 digit dialed string using fleet numbering scheme access The format of this string is as follows PPP FFFF NN N Where PPP assigned Number Prefix for the desired fleet 200 327 FFFF assigned Fleet Group or Individual number 2001 6050 and NN N is the 2 or 3 digit group or individual number PSTN
154. e in distinct Roaming Classes of Service available Caution Never link the last Roaming Class of Service to the first This may cause the Model 827 to search in an endless loop generating an error indicating that Roaming Classes of Service are linked together in an endless loop TONE AND VOICE PROMPT PROGRAMMING Voice prompts can be used to prompt the telephone user at various stages during an interconnect call in the Model 827 Voice prompts come with the interconnect option in each Model 827 Voice prompts are only heard by the telephone user in an interconnect call The radios will never hear voice prompts These prompts can be recorded by the Model 827 site operator Each prompt can be programmed site wide on a per prompt basis to use a voice prompt a tone or no prompt at all Further for each interconnected Model 827 at a site voice prompts can be enabled or disabled The site wide telephone prompts can be modified viewed by selecting SITE SITE CONFIG and then entering a in Prompts field in the data window of the site selected sample of the Voice Prompt screen is shown in Figure 6 40 To enable disable Voice Prompts on a per line basis enter a Y N in the Enable Voice Prompts field in the Telco Port data window by selecting SITE TELCO PORTS Table 6 1 shows the results of these selections 6 68 Section 6 System Programming SITE SITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode
155. e product with any other host may result in a hazard and will invalidate the Industry Canada approval 1 Remove all cabling and power from the back of the Model 827 Trunking Controller 2 Remove the top cover from the M827 Trunking Controller 3 Observe approved ESD safety procedure and remove the 702 9758 Telephone Interface board from the 10x15 anti static packing bag in the 950 9002 4 Insert J3 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface into P5 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller Securely attach to the chassis using the six screws provided Refer to Figure 4 10 5 Remove the Processor Board 702 9746 from the M827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 Next remove the four SRAM ICs 321 1001 from the conductive foam and install into sockets U42 through U45 on the Trunking Controller Board 702 9745 Install the Processor Board back into the M827 Trunking Controller Refer to Figure 4 10 C 3 Appendix C Canadian Telephone Interface Option 6 Refer to TELEPHONE INTERFACE INSTALLATION on page C 2 to configure the M827 for the proper telephone line type Attach all cabling to rear of Unit Attach the telephone cable 709 7431 into J1 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface and plug the other end into an appropriate PSTN wall socket Apply power to Unit and perform setup as outlined in the Telephone portion of the Tests and Adjustments subsection of Section 4 of the Model 827 Operation and Installation m
156. e rate at which radios are instructed to send MAINT PERIODIC messages while transmitting on the traffic channel The traffic channel does not actually require messages to be received at this interval 6 15 Section 6 System Programming TW Timeout The TW timeout is the time in seconds that a calling unit will wait for further signaling when queued The control channel uses this time out to determine how often to check if a calling unit is still waiting while it is queued Number of Retries AHY Availability Check The Number of Retries AHY Availability Check field sets the number of times the control channel will retry an AHY availability check message Number of Retries SDM2 Short Data Messages The Number of Retries SDM2 Short Data Messages field sets the number of times the control channel will retry a HEAD short data message header to the called unit Traffic Channel Selection The Traffic Channel Selection field selects the method which is used by the control channel when allocating a traffic channel The available choices are as follows F First Lowest available channel R Rotary select the first channel available starting at the next highest channel after the last one allocated or L Least used of the available channels Group Call Group Call sets the group call type to either Group or I Individual If is selected the group ident will be sent by the radio unit in PRESSEL On Off messages if T has bee
157. e sent on the traffic channel at the end of a call COR Thresholds The COR Thresholds fields set an Active and Inactive time for determining the presence or absence of COR COUNTRY DATA PROGRAMMING The Country data contains pre defined parameters that are specific to a particular country Most of these parameters pertain to the established telephone standards in each country This information should rarely if ever need to be changed and therefore remains hidden from view until Shift F8 is pressed while the cursor is on the main menu Figure 6 10 shows the Country data menu selection when activated by Shift F8 M827 Database Manager V2 30 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode a gt Sate COS Units Comm File otHer Site config MPT1327 Config Network Repeater Telco Ports Dial Plan Least Cost Route OutDial Table toll Class of Service Country data HELP Select item with arrow keys and ER or capital letter ESC to quit Edit Country Data allows custom configuration parameters to be specified Additions deletions and modifications can be done Then use Comm Update OZ Figure 6 10 Country Data Selection A sample of the Country data screen is shown in Figure 6 11 All of the fields in the Country data must be programmed The only field highlighted on the screen is the Country field although all fields are necessary In most cases howe
158. ecs Calls Queued gt 60secs Calls Canceled by Orig Calls Failed Party Unavailable Calls Failed Party Busy Calls Failed Party Timed Out Time Active as Control Channel TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call Time Idle Time Busy Total Calls Time Clearing Down Calls Messages Txed Good Responses Bit Errors Bit Pair Errors Not Decodable w SYNT Time RX Jammed Time Cross Busied TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound Num Inbound Calls Time Outbound Num Outbound Calls Time Disabled Disabled Count B 10 6AM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 7AM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 8AM 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000 00 00 00000 00000
159. ect item with arrow keys and ENTER or capital letter ESC to quit Set user entered or automatic time on unit Still connected to System Figure 5 16 Comm Other Menu Set Submenu From the Set submenu the following operations can be performed e The Time can be set in all of the Model 827s at the selected site This operation must be performed soon after the initial installation and programming of a Model 827 site This sets the clock in each of the Model 827s at the site which is used for time stamping all of the billing records When this operation is performed M827BASE will look in the Site Configuration database at the Set M827 time from PC time field to decide how to send the time to the Model 827s See Section 6 for complete details If the Set M827 time from PC time field is set to Y M827BASE will send the time from the PC s internal clock down to the Model 827s according to the additional programming from Set M827 time from PC time pop up window If Set M827 time from PC time field 15 set to then M827BASE will prompt the user to enter the time and date to be sent down to the Model 827s when the COMM OTHER SET TIME menu item is activated e The Password operation allows the password used between M827BASE and the Model 827 to be changed or set simultaneously in both the Model 827s and M827BASE This password is used during the connect procedure between M827B
160. ected to the Model 827 followed by the digits to overdial once the Model 827 has answered the line Notice these two numbers are separated by a semicolon The semicolon specifies a prompt for the initiating modem Notice also that the overdial digits or the digits after the semicolon include the leading digit from the Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access field followed by the digits entered in the Modem access number field The baud rate must also be set in this window 5 7 Section 5 Getting Started SITE SITE CONFIG INDEX Site Site Name Country 001 LOCAL SITE UK HELP Enter phone number to use to access the site ote To use internal modem in originate mode you must enter a phone number and overdial code as follows where the semicolon modem 88888 Specifies prompt for internal SUPERVISOR mode SITE CONFIG Site Number 001 Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access O Comm Port 1 Se ORG MODEM Mo Internal Modem Originate Mode Phone 8206363 488 Re Baud Rate 2400 S demand resources Y Emerg call time limit 05 00 Alarms reported to N Repeat alarm 002 Interval 020 Country UK Emerg call Edit Call Parms Y Schedule Y Prompts Y Networking Parms Y Diversion Parms Y 01 23 96 Create Date Alter Date Figure 5 5 Site Configuration Internal Modem Window 3 Be sure t
161. ed for multi site and dip switch 5 is in the down position element 6 will light immediately after power up and remain lit during the cloning process which may take several minutes After cloning is complete element 6 will be turned off to indicate the site is not enabled for multi site operation If dip switch 5 of switch 1 is in the up position multi site operation will be disabled even if the option has been installed 2 Establish communication with the Model 827 site using M827BASE and retrieve status from the site by activating the COMM STATUS INFO menu item Verify that status was retrieved from each of the Model 827 units at the site Activate the COMM CHANNEL MONITOR menu item and verify that all channels corresponding to the Model 827 units are present and active 3 Have someone call the unit and access the modem programming Verify errors are not present during modem communication see Section 5 4 Place a radio unit to telephone call through the Model 827 and verify the audio levels are set correctly Place a telephone to radio unit call also to verify gain levels in both directions 4 26 Section 4 Installation OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS Refer to Figure 4 1 1 SENSE INPUTS P3 pins 7 10 are signal monitoring connections Internally they are pulled up to 5 VDC through a 47K ohm resistor The sense inputs are active low and intended for connection to a logic signal or relay contacts Each input can accept a signal of
162. ed in PSTN PABX to Radio Calls in Section 3 Disconnect on Call Progress Tone The Disconnect on Call Progress tone is used to tell all the Model 827s at this site to disconnect the interconnect call in progress if dial tone or any of the Cadence tones entered in the Cadence Table are detected For instance during a radio originated call if the Model 827 detects dial tone because the called party went on hook the Model 827 will disconnect the call if this field is set to If this field is set to the call would not disconnect until the radio disconnects the call or a call limit time out expires Please refer to Cadence Table on page 6 23 for more information Minimum Speech PSTN Call Length to Store The Min Speech PSTN Call Length to store fields determine how long the elapsed time of the call must be before a call detail record is stored for billing purposes Any calls with an elapsed time less than the Min Call Length to store will not be stored Calls with an elapsed time greater than the Min Call Length to store will have a billing record stored Store Call Detail Records The Store Call Detail Records fields will determine whether a Call Detail Record is stored for Registration Transactions Status Calls Short Data SDM2 Calls Call Failures or whether informational intersite records are stored Lead Digit to Designate Direct Dial Access The Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access field indicates the lead digi
163. ed two separate telephone lines Connecting one modem directly to the other modem without a PSTN in between will not work 9 Make sure everything is powered on and then select COMM TELCO MONITOR from the Main Menu bar in M827BASE Your PC will dial the telephone number and pause From the PC modem s speaker you should hear the Model 827 s external modem answer the call and the two modems will handshake If the modem handshake is successful you will see the Telco Monitor screen come up NOTE If this does not work and you are sure that your cabling DIP switches both speed and mode telephone number modem access digits COM port selections are correct then verify that the interrupt jumpers for the COM port in your PC are set right IRQ4 for COMI or IRQ3 for COM2 10 Now you can access any of the M827BASE menu items that require a communication link with the Model 827 site 5 13 Section 5 Getting Started Multi site programming using Intersite Links Any networked site within a multi site network can communicate to the PC using the intersite links as a virtual connection Both serial and audio links are used Serial links are the preferred method of linking sites as they use less system resources and are faster If an audio link is used it is dedicated for the duration of the communication session and is considerably slower NOTE Emergency calls cannot demand an intersite audio link if it is currently being used as a vi
164. eet 6 43 general COS 6 41 groups 6 52 least cost route 6 63 MPT1327 configuration 6 12 network 6 25 outdial table 6 59 repeater 6 26 roam COS 6 66 site configuration 6 2 telco ports 6 32 units 6 51 programming access 6 3 programming cable local RS 232 5 3 Index prompt list 6 74 prompt memory 6 71 PSTN PABX overdial speech calls 3 17 PSTN PABX to radio calls 3 16 PTT led 4 29 Q queue size 6 26 queueing repeater 6 12 telco 6 12 queuing busy 6 13 intersite calls on busy 6 9 intersite queue timeout 6 9 repeater 6 13 telco 6 13 R radio to PSTN calls 3 13 radio unit to PABX calls 3 15 receiver jammed timer 6 28 registration 3 5 secondary 6 9 timeout secondary 6 9 registration parameters transmitting 6 17 repeater data cross busy 6 27 cross busy wait time 6 28 enable delay 6 29 interburst period 6 28 keyup delay 6 28 play station ID 6 28 received and transmit delays 6 29 receiver jammed timer 6 28 RF logical channel number 6 27 send MARK message in burst control channel mode 6 28 sense alarms 6 29 target frames per burst 6 28 unit number 6 27 use channel as 6 27 repeater jammed reset time 6 4 repeater led 4 29 repeater operating mode 6 27 report alarms to radio 6 4 required calling number 6 23 reset units hard 5 27 soft 5 27 revert to traffic 6 17 RF logical channel number 6 27 ringing 6 24 rings until answer 6 35 roam COS 6 66 roam
165. efix and ident of the called or calling unit is displayed as well as whether the call is incoming or outgoing and the time elapsed since the call began Emergency calls are displayed in red reverse video Multi site calls are displayed in white high intensity In addition intermediate sites no traffic channel used on that site are identified by the letter after the link number which follows the IN or OUT indication If the is not shown then the traffic channel number is displayed after the IN or OUT If a telephone interface is currently involved in a modem call or voice prompt recording then SERVICE will be displayed in the STATUS column on the monitor screen If a telephone line is currently idle then IDLE will be displayed DISABLED will be displayed in the STATUS column if the telco port is currently disabled in the database If the telephone interface is not installed in one of the Model 827s at a site then UNUSED will be displayed in the STATUS column 5 21 Section 5 Getting Started Figure 5 12 is a sample screen from a Telco Monitor session COMM TELCO MONITOR SUPERVISOR mode Model 827 Telco Monitor Site 001 24 Jan 2000 13 00 16 LINE STATUS UNIT TIME LINE STATUS UNIT TIME 01 IN 03 000 0008 00059 17 02 18 03 IDLE 19 04 20 05 SERVICE 2L 06 22 07 23 08 24 09 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 I3 29 14 30 15 3T 16 32
166. els of Security There are four functional levels of security which can be assigned a password and one very limited access level for which no password is necessary referred to as level 0 Although functional level 4 has access to all M827BASE s capabilities the functional levels do not reflect levels of increasing capability Rather these levels reflect different areas of responsibility The following list summarizes the functional levels Figure 5 21 shows the functional level required for each operation in M827BASE Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Main Menu Monitor System Operation Managing Site dependent database information Managing User database information Managing Call Detail Records for billing Supervisor Overall System Operation and Administration Site Site Config Level 144 MPT1327 Config Level 1 4 Network Level 1 4 Repeater Level 1 4 Telco Ports Level 1 4 Dial Plan Level 1 4 Least Cost Route Level 1 4 OutDial Table Level 1 4 Toll Class of Service Level 1 2 4 Country data Level 1 4 COS General Level 1 2 4 Roam Level 1 2 4 Units Fleets Level 2 4 Units Level 2 4 Groups Level 2 4 Autodial Table Level 2 4 Comm Update Global Entire Level 1 2 4 Site Site Config Level 144 Network Level 1 4 Repeater Level 1 4 Telco Ports Level 1 4 Dial Plan Level 1 4 Least Cost Route Level 1 4 OutDial Table Level 1 4 Toll Class of Service Level 1 2 4 COS shes Level 1 2 4
167. em Programming Data Call Limit Time The Data Call Limit Time field sets the time limit in minutes and seconds to use for non prescribed data calls If 0 00 or a blank field is entered the call will have an infinite call duration timer Full Off Air Call Setup The Use Full Off Air Call Setup fields select if Full Off Air call setup should be used for individual and or incoming telephone calls Full Off Air Call Setup requires the user of a called radio unit to accept an incoming call before the unit is sent to the traffic channel If N is entered in the Individual Calls or Phone field a pop up window will appear asking if the Model 827 should Play Ringing Tones to the Called Unit If Y is entered in this field the radio unit user will hear ringing tones through the radio s speaker until the radio has been keyed up to answer the call No Answer Timeout The No Answer Time out field sets the amount of time in seconds the system will wait for a called party to answer a call Allow Call To allow a radio unit to make an ALL CALL the Allow All Call field must be set to Full Duplex The Full Duplex field should be set to if you wish to allow mobiles to operate in full duplex mode Mobiles with full duplex capability must set the 3rd Least Significant bit in the INFO field of the RQR message Allow Intersite The Allow Intersite field should be set to Y if you have the multi site option installed and y
168. en be mapped to a unit group or fleet Once all the dialing information has been received and the corresponding unit or group is found the unit being called will be validated If it is valid a request will be made to the control channel for a repeater to be allocated for the call Once the control channel has been notified to allocate a traffic channel for an incoming telephone call it will first determine if an individual or group is being called If a group is being called the calling party will hear the Thank you ringing prompt if it has been recorded followed by ringing If no traffic channel is available and the traffic channel queue is enabled and is not full the call will be queued Otherwise the system busy prompt will be played to the calling party and the call will be disconnected If the call has been queued and no channels become available before the queue timer or the no answer timeout expires the call will be disconnected All incoming telephone calls to a group are setup as conference calls If the incoming call is to an individual the control channel will determine if the individual has been programmed for Full Off Air Call Setup If so the control channel will first attempt to allocate a traffic channel if none is available the call will be queued immediately if queuing is enabled otherwise the system busy prompt will be played to the calling party and the call will be disconnected If a traffic channel is availab
169. es Subscribers Groups Fleets Section 2 Specifications 2 4 wire leased circuit or 4 wire E amp M microwave radio link through telephone interface Line conditioning of C2 or better as defined in Bell System Technical Reference Pub 41004 Data Comm Using Voiceband Private Line Channels Oct 73 is required Minimum of 1 per intersite connection 2 4 wire leased circuit V28 or similar 1 only per intersite connection 24 radio channels per site 32 sites per system 5000 subscribers expandable to 15 000 2000 group identities expandable to 6000 500 fleets per system expandable to 2000 ACCOUNTING SPECIFICATIONS Record Types Capacity Stored Information Filtering Registration status short data SDM2 mobile to mobile mobile to landline landline to mobile landline to diverted mobile multisite mobile to mobile multisite land to mobile multisite mobile to group and multisite land to group Minimum 3656 to a maximum of 7313 records stored internally Actual record size depends on call type Landline to mobile mobile to landline and multisite calls require twice the storage of other call types Called Calling prefix and ident start date time call duration channel and line assigned dialed number Programmable minimum call time to store for speech and interconnect Storage of registration status SDM2s call failures and informational multisite records can be set to on or off 2 3
170. essage or COR circuit going inactive COR activity thresholds are programmable under the Traffic Parameters window in the MPT1327 Configuration To eliminate squelch tails the channel s audio will be muted for approximately 150ms after receiving a PRESSEL OFF message If a MAINT message is received from a radio unit that is not a part of the current call a MAINT SELECTIVE CLEAR will be sent to clear unwanted radio units off the channel A call can be terminated by the radio unit sending a number of MAINT DISCONNECT messages no activity for a pre programmed inactivity time on the channel or the system timing out the call In addition for interconnect calls K break or battery can be used to detect PSTN disconnect if available from the telephone company plus a DTMF can be entered from the telephone port to disconnect the call Call limit timers for normal calls can be programmed for different time periods of the day thus allowing shorter times to be set for busy periods and longer times for off peak hours Each timer period can apply to weekdays weekends or both An additional option is available for individuals each individual can be assigned a fixed time limit to be used instead of those programmed in the time of day schedule If a fixed time limit has been assigned then regardless of the time of day when a call is placed that individual is allocated the time specified by their fixed call limit Separate call limit timers are available fo
171. from a telephone For a description of when each prompt is played please refer to Voice and Tone Prompts Voice Prompt Programming Access Notice the first field in the VOICE PROMPT screen called Access for Programming When overdial is being used the number of valid digits in this field must match the Number of digits to expect after lead in the CALL PARMS pop up window under SITE SITE CONFIG For example let s say the Number of digits to expect after lead is set to 2 and the Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access on the same window is set to 4 Now in the VOICE PROMPT screen the Programming Access field contains 99 or 0000099 This means that once you have dialed the Model 827 site and the Model 827 answer and plays the welcome message you dial 499 to access voice prompt programming If the Security code on the VOICE PROMPT screen is left blank you will go directly to voice recording If the Security code is filled in you will hear a burst of dial tone telling you to dial the security code If you misdial the security code you will hear either the System Busy voice prompt or congestion tone and the call will be disconnected If you entered the correct security code you will be granted access to voice recording For telephone line types where feed digits are received from the PSTN the number entered in the Access for programming field must match the n
172. g note 1000 is subtracted before the request is sent to the controller and then added back on before dialing out the PABX If no match is found in the dialing plan tables these calls are routed by finding those telephone ports which have been programmed as being connected to a PABX and which have an assigned PABX Id which matches the exchange number contained in the received RQS message Calls to a PABXI ident are treated in the same manner as calls to a PSTNGI ident 3 15 Section 3 Operation PSTN PABX to Radio Calls Incoming calls can occur in one of two ways 1 Ina system provided with subscriber lines if a person wishes to call a mobile user they dial in on one of the lines connected to the system receive a go ahead tone or voice prompt and overdial an extension or User identity code that corresponds to the individual or group being called Once the overdial digits are received the unit being called will be validated and if they are valid a request will be made to the control channel for a repeater to be allocated for the call 2 Ina system provided with E amp M lines with direct inward dial users on the system are assigned a telephone number that the calling party dials to directly access the unit group or a fleet If a fleet is being called the calling party will be prompted to overdial the unit or group required within the fleet In each case the telephone company will supply the feed digits the feed digits will th
173. g matched in the Dial Plan and performs any programmed modifications to the digit string before dialing occurs The Toll Class of Service defines which dialed digit strings may be specifically allowed or restricted The Toll Class of Service is site specific because dialing strings that are local calls vary from site to site Once a class of service is defined it can be assigned to any unit in the system The Country data allows country specific data to be adjusted as needed The information in this database should rarely if ever need to be changed For this reason this menu selection remains hidden from view until Shift F8 is pressed while the cursor is on the main menu 6 1 Section 6 System Programming The General Class of Service defines what types of calls can be made by each unit assigned to the class The General Class of Service is defined system wide and can be assigned to any unit in the system The Roam Class of Service defines which sites a unit can roam to and which Toll Class of Service and which Dial Plan is applied at each of the sites allowed The Roam Class of Service is defined system wide and can be assigned to any unit in the system The Fleets database defines each fleet in the system It defines the prefix for the fleet as well as the range of IDENTS associated with the fleet The Units database allows individual units to be assigned to a fleet given a unit number within the fleet and assigned a General a
174. g resources 3 25 group calls 3 24 individual calls 3 20 linking 3 18 operation 3 19 operation with lost links 3 26 radio to PSTN PABX calls 3 25 registration home site 3 19 primary site 3 19 secondary site 3 19 roaming and registration 3 19 multi site operation enabling 4 32 multi site option switch 4 27 N network data baud rate 6 26 connected site 6 25 queue size 6 26 serial port 6 25 trunk group 6 26 network operator identity 6 13 network parameters 6 8 network route table 6 9 queue site 6 10 serial baud rate 6 10 serial port 6 9 site 6 9 trunk group 6 10 no answer timeout 6 43 non standard data call 3 10 number of digits to expect after lead 6 6 Index number of feed digits 6 38 number prefix 3 10 O optional connections 4 28 control outputs 4 28 PTT relay 4 28 sense inputs 4 28 other menu 5 31 outdial program 6 57 6 59 outdial table 6 58 6 59 overdialing direct access to fleet 3 17 MPT1343 format 3 17 number of feed digits 3 17 technicians access 3 17 P password change database manager 5 27 passwords 5 32 assigning 5 35 levels of security 5 33 restoring 5 36 using 5 35 PCM cable 4 17 play alert tones for incoming phone calls 6 54 power supply 4 18 prearrange PSTN destination See radio to PSTN calls pressel inhibit number sent 6 19 pressel on enable 6 19 programming 6 50 autodial 6 55 country data 6 20 dial plan 6 64 fl
175. gulations AVIS CANADIEN Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL WARNINGS Installation of the Model 827 and Model 827 telephone interface option must be accomplished only by qualified personnel experienced in telephone radio communications systems WARNING The Model 827 requires 13 volt DC at 2 amps supplied by an external power supply that meets European Standard for safety EN 60950 Other usage will INVALIDATE any APPROVAL given to this apparatus The approval of the Model 827 telephone interface option 950 9640 for connection to the British Telecom public switched telephone network is INVALIDATED if the apparatus is subject to any modification in any material way not authorized by BABT or it is used with or connected to internal software that has not been formally accepted by II external control software or external control apparatus which causes the operation of the interconnect or associated call setup equipment to contravene the requirements of the standard set out in NTR3 All apparatus connected to this interconnect and thereby connected directly or indirectly to British Telecom Private Speechband circuits must be approved apparatus as defined in Section 22 of the British Telecommunications Act 1984 The Model 827 telephone interface option 950 9640 is suitable for connection to BT Direct Ex
176. h non correctable errors 11 Seconds Receiver was Jammed Number of seconds the repeater was in a Jammed state A repeater is considered jammed when COR becomes active while the repeater is in an idle state due to external RF interference 12 Seconds Cross Busied Number of seconds the repeater was crossed busied by another repeater sharing the channel TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT STATISTICS If an optional interconnect board is installed the Model 827 records the following hourly statistics counters 1 Seconds Processing Inbound Calls Number of seconds used for processing inbound interconnect calls 2 Inbound Calls Number of inbound calls received by the interconnect port on this Model 827 3 Seconds Processing Outbound Calls Number of seconds used for processing outbound interconnect calls 4 Outbound Calls Number of outbound calls processed by the interconnect port on this Model 827 5 Interconnect Port Disabled due to Error Number of times the interconnect port was disabled because of an error Errors include dial tone not being detected when required and invalid signaling received from telephone system or PABX B 3 Appendix B Statistics Files 6 Seconds in Disabled State Number of seconds the interconnect port was disabled due to error condition SAMPLE STATISTICS FILE When statistics are retrieved from a Model 827 site M827BASE will store the data in an ASCII file in the M827BASE directory
177. hared If a password exists for one level of a shared menu item and no password has been assigned to the other level that is a single asterisk is assigned access will be denied for the users at the level with no password assigned If you enter the same password not an asterisk for more than one level a user with that password will have access to all levels with that password Using Passwords When M827BASE is restarted you will see the familiar Main Menu screen Attempting to activate a menu item in a functional level with a password assigned will result in a prompt asking you for your password If you enter an incorrect password you can try again by activating that menu item again If you enter the correct password the menu choice will be entered and you will have gained new access privileges associated with the password level entered You cannot return to level 0 without exiting M827BASE If you entered level 4 you cannot return to any other level without exiting M827BASE The diagram in Figure 5 22 illustrates this navigation 5 35 Section 5 Getting Started Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Figure 5 22 Migration Path between Password Access Levels To prevent unauthorized access to M827BASE users must quit M827BASE after they are finished Restoring Passwords If you are a user of Levels 1 2 or 3 and you forget your password the system administrator can use the password for Level 4
178. has a corresponding control output labeled CNTL on the Model 827 back panel The Set Output field specifies whether the corresponding control output is activated when an alarm condition is triggered on the sense input Entering a Y will activate the control output upon an alarm condition Report The Report field specifies whether the alarm condition on this sense input is reported to the programmed alarm report radio or telephone The Report Alarms to Radio field in the Site Configuration must also be set for this feature to work Refer to Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 The alarm will be reported if both fields are set to Auto Clear The Auto Clear field tells the Model 827 whether to automatically clear the alarm if the alarm condition goes away Setting this field to N means that the alarm condition will remain until the system operator manually clears the alarm by activating the COMM OTHER CLEAR ALARM menu item Refer to Section 4 for details on this function If this field is set to Y then the Model 827 will automatically clear the alarm condition when the alarm condition is no longer present Check on PTT Only If Check on PTT Only is set to then the Model 827 will only monitor the sense input while the repeater is transmitting otherwise the sense input is monitored constantly Disable Repeater The Disable Rptr field specifies whether the Model 827 will be disabled for use as a traffic or control cha
179. he Model 827 receives a call request to a PSTNGI ident it will demand the full called party information from the calling unit Toll Restriction Once the number to dial has been obtained by the Model 827 the number will be toll restricted Toll Restriction Classes of Service are programmed for each site and then assigned in the Roaming Class of Service for each site to which a unit is allowed access If no Toll Restriction Class of Service is assigned to a particular unit for a particular site no toll restriction will take place Up to 8 Toll Class of Service tables can be assigned for each site with each table containing up to 32 entries Each entry consists of digits and various wildcard designators and can be marked as either allowed or restricted If wildcard designators are used it is possible for a dialed string to match more than one entry in a table The dialed number is compared against each entry in the Toll Class of Service assigned to the unit initiating the call If the dialed string does not match any entries in the designated table or it matches an entry designated as allowed the call will be allowed If the dialed string matches an entry designated as restricted and does not match any entries designated as allowed the call will be rejected If however the dialed string matches both a restricted and an allowed entry the call will be allowed Least Cost Routing If the number dialed is not restricted once the required resource
180. he baud rate you select in M827BASE matches the baud rate DIP switch setting of the Model 827 you wish to communicate with Refer to Table 5 2 below Also make sure that the dip switch controlling whether the internal modem should use CCITT or Bell standards is set correctly This is controlled by switch 8 on SW2 which is the switch on the right as you face the Model 827 front panel See Table 5 3 The default mode is CCITT which is the down position Table 5 2 Internal Modem Baud Rate Settings Internal Modem Baud Rate Front Panel Baud Rate SW1 Settings Up 2400 bps 4800 bps 5 8 Section 5 Getting Started Table 5 3 Internal Modem Operational Settings Operational Mode SW2 8 CCITT Standard Bell Standard In M827BASE enter the correct Comm number which has the modem connected to it If you are using an external modem with your PC connect the modem to your computer s RS 232 COM port Most computer stores carry the necessary modem cable normally a straight through wiring Pay attention to the connectors you will need on both ends of the cable Most modems have a female DB25 connector so the cable must have a male DB25 connector on the modem end The PC COM port will have either a DB9 or DB25 male connector This means the PC end of the cable will need a female DB9 or female DB25 connector Do not confuse the PC s serial COM port with the parallel printer port which is a female DB25 c
181. he site When a site is operating in fixed control channel mode the unit currently functioning as the control channel will remain the control channel unless for some reason the master unit no longer sees it on the bus The master will then assign the next lowest numbered unit that is designated as a control channel to be the new control channel When a site is configured for cyclic operation the control channel will cycle between all channels designated as either control only or control and traffic for a pre programmed dwell time The programmable dwell time field can be found under the MPT1327 Parameters window of the MPT1327 Configuration screen of the M827BASE 3 4 Section 3 Operation A cross busied control channel physically shares the RF channel with other equipment on the same channel See CROSS BUSY OPERATION on page 3 8 In each of the control channel modes if the system is configured for a non dedicated control channel and all traffic channels are busy the control channel will be assigned for traffic if no queuing has been enabled or the queue is full In such cases the first channel that becomes available that is configured for control operation will become the new control channel See Traffic Channel on page 3 5 Slotted Aloha Protocol Radios units are invited to access the system using a random access protocol based on slotted Aloha with a superimposed framing structure The control channel transmits a synchroniz
182. he storage of status and registration records and by setting the minimum call time to store for speech mobile to mobile and landline calls Records are retrieved and stored on your office PC by selecting the COMMIRETRIEVE BILLING option of the Model 827 Database Program Each time the billing records are retrieved a user file is also created containing in ASCII information on the fleets units and groups programmed in the database This information along with the billing records provides the information needed to generate customer s bills Each call record stored contains the following information e Record Type registration local status local short data local mobile to mobile local mobile to landline local landline to mobile local landline to diverted mobile home site copy of intersite status short data mobile to mobile mobile to 3 27 Section 3 Operation group land to mobile land to group initiating site copy of intersite mobile to mobile mobile to group land to mobile land to group destination site copy of intersite mobile to mobile mobile to group land to mobile status short data intermediate site copy of intersite mobile group landline originated Calling Prefix Ident not used for local landline to mobile Called Prefix Ident not used for mobile to landline or registration Called Party Type individual or group Call Priority normal priority or emergency Call Type speech or data
183. hen further specify under what conditions the diversion will take affect The diversion can take affect only when the radio is busy or only when the radio does not answer or both when the radio is busy and when it does not answer When the radio user has this feature enabled in its General Class of Service the radio user just sends a pre programmed status message to a pre programmed ident When the controller receives this status message it will toggle the switch for this feature and reply to the radio by sending another pre programmed status message This status message sent back to the radio tells it the current state of the switch it just toggled One status message means the switch is now ON and another status message means the switch is now OFF Billing All information for call detail records is sent to the calling subscriber s home site for storage and subsequent retrieval Additionally all sites involved in a transaction retain informational transaction records for diagnostic purposes The storage of the informational records can be disabled in the Site Configuration programming Refer to Appendix A for detailed information on the format of the intersite call detail records Operating With Lost Links When lost links between sites occur the sites remain surprisingly capable When two sites are linked with both 4 wire audio and serial links the loss of the serial link only increases connect times The system will automatically revert to us
184. hion on top of one of the existing PCM cable connections Attach the other end of the second cable to the third unit 4 17 Section 4 Installation 10 11 by screwing it into unit s PCM DATA BUS port Interconnect up to 24 Model 827s in this daisy chained manner POWER SUPPLY Locate the 12V DC supply for the repeater transmitter With a DVM measure the DC voltage It must be between 10 5 and 16 volts and capable of at least 2 amps of current When using a DC supply the positive connection must be to P2 terminal 1 and the negative to P2 terminal 2 The Model 827 is internally fused with a 2 ampere fast blow fuse Verify that the Power LED lights when power is applied Also if multiple units are trunked together verify that the Bus LED is flashing on one unit and is on solid on all other units CANADIAN TELCO OPTION INSTALLATION If you have a Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option 950 0002 please refer to Appendix C instead of the following UK Telco information UK TELCO OPTION INSTALLATION If you have no telephone interface options proceed to TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS on page 4 21 If you have telephone interface options 950 9640 that have not yet been installed in a Model 827 chassis then complete this step before continuing If you have already installed telephone interface options make sure the desired line type is selected as follows before proceeding to TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS on page 4 21
185. his is how M827BASE keeps track of which groups belong to which fleets Group Number Group Number is the MPT1343 Unit Number assigned to this group This number must be in the range 90 to 99 or 900 to 998 according to the definition of the Fleet that this group is a member of Enable Late Entry Enable Late Entry allows members of a group who missed the start of a call to join the group call in progress Join Existing Call The Join Existing Call field determines if an individual requesting a group call to a busy group should be added to the existing call Note if a mobile is added to an existing group and the Group Call type is set to the COR must be used as a call activity indicator no 6 53 Section 6 System Programming audio will be heard if the mobile who joined the call wishes to talk See Group Call on page 6 16 and Voice Call Activity Indicators on page 6 18 Allow Incoming from Phone A group can not initiate a PSTN PABX call however a group can receive an incoming telephone call The Allow Incoming from Phone field enables or disables incoming telephone calls to this group depending on whether Yes or No is entered here Play Alert Tones for Incoming Phone Calls The Play alert tones for incoming telephone calls field will determine whether or not alert tones or ringing will be played to the radios in this group If a Y is entered in this field ringing will be played to the radios and w
186. his is the first time you are installing M827BASE follow the steps below 1 Insert the Model 827 Database Manager for DOS installation disk PN 950 9787 into diskette drive A 2 Type lt gt to log on to drive A 3 Type INSTALL lt ENTER gt 4 Follow the on screen instructions The INSTALL program will prompt you to enter the directory you want to put M827BASE into we recommend using the directory name 5 1 Section 5 Getting Started M827BASE Install will create the directory if it does not exist then copy all M827BASE files into the directory 5 Once the installation procedure is complete make sure the program runs by typing M827BASE lt ENTER gt Upgrade Installation If an earlier version of M827BASE was already installed on your office computer and you want to upgrade to a newer version of the software follow the steps below Caution DO NOT copy a newer version of M827BASE software directly into an old M827BASE directory using the COPY command If this is done user entered data will be lost 1 Retrieve current billing data if the information is important to you using COMM RETRIEVE operation 2 Backup your data to floppy diskettes with the FILE BACKUP operation Follow the on screen instructions for backing up database information 3 Insert the new Model 827 Database Manager for DOS diskette P N 950 9787 into drive A 4 Type lt gt to log on
187. ick Detect Gain is a gain that can be adjusted when dial click decoding is being used This gain can be increased to try to improve dial click decoding on lines with marginal audio 6 24 Section 6 System Programming Digital Hybrid The Digital Hybrid in the Model 827 is some extra DSP processing of the audio to remove side tone and echo This function can be enabled or disabled with the Enable field The Mode field adjusts the balance between audio fidelity and feedback control NETWORK PROGRAMMING The Multi site network information can be accessed by selecting SITE NETWORK in M827BASE The network database only operates with main firmware 2 30 or greater Once a site has been selected you can program the multi links between the selected site and the other sites comprising the system For information on the rest of the fields refer to the on screen HELP for each field SITE NETWORK SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 St SR TG Connected Site 002 002 02 Serial Port 003 03 Baud Rate 19200 Trunk Group 02 Queue Size 2 Create Date 03 22 00 Alter Date 04 20 00 Edit press ENTER RETURN lt Guide Window Fl Done Esc Figure 6 14 Required Repeater Configuration Fields Connected Site The connected site field selects the to be site connected to The site number of a connected site should be selected from the programmed sites to be entered in this field Serial Po
188. idle quickly enough the system will set up the emergency group call with the resources that are currently available Multi Site Radio to PSTN PABX Calls In a multi site network it is possible to place a PSTN PABX call from a site that physically does not have a PSTN PABX port The request is routed over an intersite link to a site that has a PSTN PABX port the number is dialed out to the port and audio is connected across the network This feature uses the Least Cost Routing feature of the Model 827 to decide how to route the PSTN PABX request through the network according to the digits dialed by the radio user Please refer to Least Cost Route Programming in Section 6 for examples and an explanation of least cost routing Once Least Cost Routing at a single site is mastered this concept is just expanded to use intersite links to route calls to distant sites with PSTN PABX ports Multi Site Diversions Divert on Busy and No Answer When a radio is allowed in it s General Class of Service and it sets up a diversion the diversion information will be forwarded to the radio s home site and then the home site will broadcast the information to all the sites it knows of in it s network table Then when a call is placed to this radio from anywhere in the network the site where the call is initiated will know about the diversion and signal the requesting radio appropriately 3 25 Section 3 Operation Once a radio has set up a diversion it can t
189. ile initiated multisite calls home site number of called mobile for landline initiated multisite calls Incoming Link Num 2 Number of the incoming link used for destination and intermediate site records Outgoing Link Num 2 Number of the outgoing link used for origination and intermediate site records CRLF Carriage Return Line Feed A 6 Appendix A Call Detail Files USER FILE RECORD FORMAT Each time billing information is retrieved from a site a user file is created containing information on all fleets units and groups programmed for that site The user file can also be created at any time by selecting the OTHER CREATE USER FILE option in M827BASE The user file is named 000 where site number and MMDD current day and month and is stored in the same directory as the billing data files The user file consists of a header record followed by three types of records fleet unit and group The file is organized such that each fleet is followed first by the units that are members of that fleet and then by the groups which are members The first character on each line indicates the record type For all record types note that Num fields are right justified and zero filled If the size of a Num field is specified as the first is the total digits in the number the second number following the comma is the number of decimal places to assume The decimal point is not stored in the record and must be inserted by
190. ility field applies 6 69 Section 6 System Programming only to tone prompts and is used to vary the tone prompts from one country to the next The or Time field is used only for voice prompts and determines the maximum recorded length of each voice prompt Tone Prompt Compatibility The Compatibility Mode selected in the Compat field for each prompt allows for the variations in call progress tones used in different countries The Compatibility Mode identifies a group of call progress tones or tone sets which are typical for a particular country It is not necessary to have a tone set for every possible country since a tone of the right frequency and duration can be found in one of the tone sets which will closely emulate the desired call progress tone There are eight possible call progress tone sets which can be selected in the Compat field for each prompt see Figure 6 40 There are currently 5 compatibility modes or tone sets which have been defined see Table 6 2 For example assigning a compatibility mode of 7 to prompt two will play USA ringing 2 seconds on 4 seconds off where as assigning a compatibility mode of 0 will play UK ringing 400 milliseconds on 200 milliseconds off 400 milliseconds on 2 seconds off Table 6 2 Tone Compatibility Modes Compatibility Mode Country Tone Set 0 UK 3 Spain Voice Prompt Memory Notice at the bottom of the VOICE PROMPT
191. ill continue until one of the radios in the group keys up to answer the call One of the radios must key up before the Group Answer Timeout see Figure 6 8 on page 6 15 expires Otherwise the Model 827 will disconnect the call If N is entered in this field ringing will not be played to the radios in the group or to the telephone user and audio will be connected immediately This will behave as if one of the radios in the group answered the call immediately The telephone user can speak broadcast to all the radios in the group as soon as the user has overdialed the group s number and a traffic channel has been assigned Include these Sites in a Group Call In a multi site system the sites entered in the Include These Sites in a Group Call fields are the sites that you wish to have included in a call to this group The system will include as many sites that have resources available at the time the call is requested In a single site system these fields have no effect 6 54 Section 6 System Programming AUTODIAL TABLE PROGRAMMING The Autodial Tables can be accessed by selecting UNITS AUTODIAL TABLE Figure 6 32 shows the Autodial Table data window with the Table Number field highlighted This field must be entered to define a new Autodial Table The Table Number is used to assign the Autodial Table to an individual Unit see Figure 6 30 Once the Autodial Table has been defined any number of autodial numbers up to 15
192. iminate a transmit and receive tone sequence thus saving time in call set up Group Category Send The Group II Category Send field indicates which Group II tone to send when the PSTN requests it This Group II Category gives the receiving end information about what type of call is being placed See CCITT Blue Book Volume VI Fascicle VI 4 Recommendation Q 441 Paragraph 4 2 3 2 for the definition of Group II forward tones Calling Number Required The Calling Num will be Req field tells the Model 827 whether or not the PSTN will be requesting the Caller ID In an outgoing call this would be the Model 827 s telephone number Calling Number to Send The Calling Num to Send field tells the Model 827 what telephone number to send when the PSTN requests the Caller ID If this field is left blank the Model 827 will transmit a tone indicating there is no Caller ID to send Cadence Table The Cadence Table is used for Call Progress Tone detection Most Call Progress Tones are cadenced tones consisting of one or more frequencies rather than a steady tone The Model 827 compares the cadence of the tone being received on the telephone port against the entries in the Cadence Table see Figure 6 13 to determine whether the tone being detected is a Call Progress Tone or not 6 23 Section 6 System Programming SITE COUNTRY DATA SUPERVISOR mode INDEX COUNTRY FILE Country Comments Co
193. ined that a high VSWR condition exists when the sensor voltage is greater than 4 volts Sense input 1 is used for VSWR for each repeater see the Sense 1 programming in Figure 6 17 Notice the input is enabled and the condition is only checked when the unit is transmitting If an error condition is detected the repeater will be disabled and will remain disabled until cleared by the System Operator The alarm condition will be reported to the programmed alarm report radio unit using status message 10 The alarm report radio is programmed on the Site Configuration screen Refer again to Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 Example 2 In the same system each repeater has a main and a backup transmitter The System Operator wants the system to switch to the backup transmitter when the main transmitter s output drops below 25 watts An output power sensor is installed on each transmitter s output with the power sensor s output connected to the Model 827 s Sense 3 input Using a 100 watt power sensor that outputs 5 volts at 100 watts 25 watts output would be 1 25 volts Notice in Figure 6 17 that Sense 3 input is enabled and only checked when the unit is transmitting If the power output level is low output 3 will be enabled causing an external relay to switch to the backup transmitter The backup transmitter will be used until the alarm is cleared by the System Operator The alarm condition will be reported to the programmed alarm report radio unit using a st
194. ing Dong Played when the allocated time has expired when a prompt is being recorded Three Ding Dongs The digit entered is not valid at this point in voice prompt recording process For instance the prompt number is out of range or the command digit is not valid Fast Busy Two bursts of fast busy are played when the voice prompt recording process is exiting Voice Prompts List l Welcome requests the calling party to overdial the digits corresponding to the unit or group they are calling Thank you heard after the overdial digits have been entered and the called unit or group has been validated Invalid number indicates that the number dialed does not fall within any of the acceptable number ranges Overdial the unit group number requests the calling party to overdial the group or unit number within the fleet Overdial Caller Id not used Invalid Unit Group the unit or group being called has been found in the database but they have been marked as invalid Unobtainable the unit or group is not in the database Interconnect Not Allowed the unit or group is in the database but they are not allowed incoming calls from the telephone 6 74 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Section 6 System Programming User Busy the unit or group being called is busy No Answer the unit being called did not answer No Reply or Not Registered the unit being called did not respond to the availa
195. ing the 4 wire audio for passing data information if a serial link is not available When all 4 wire audio links between two sites are lost the two sites revert to single site operation Because a user s record and talk privileges are known at all sites a user can still operate on sites other than their home site Voice and Tone Prompts To help guide the user through the system both tones and user recordable voice prompts are played to the telephone party in the following situations 1 Welcome dial tone requests the calling party to overdial the digits corresponding to the unit or group they are calling 2 Thank you ringing heard after the overdial digits have been entered and the called unit or group has been validated 3 Invalid number indicates that the number dialed does not fall within any of the acceptable number ranges 4 Overdial the unit group number requests the calling party to overdial the group or unit number within the fleet 5 Overdial Caller Id not used 6 Invalid Unit Group the unit or group being called has been found in the database but they have been marked as invalid 3 26 Section 3 Operation 7 Unobtainable the unit or group is not in the database 8 Interconnect Not Allowed the unit or group is in the database but they are not allowed incoming calls from the telephone 9 User Busy the unit or group being called is busy 10 No Answer the unit being called did not answer
196. ink Complete Time The second parameter is the amount of time the envelope of time or time frame in which the wink must be detected and completed If a wink is not seen in this time frame or a wink starts but does not complete within the time frame the Model 827 will give up 6 21 SIT Co UK US Hl En re D ee Section 6 System Programming Wink Duration The Wink Duration is used when the Model 827 detects an incoming call and the PSTN PABX is expecting the Model 827 to wink This is the amount of time the Model 827 will seize the M Lead and then release it MF Mode The MF R2 signaling protocol has been implemented in the Model 827 to follow the CCITT standard defined in CCITT Blue Book Volume VI Fascicle VI 4 as closely as possible and yet have enough flexibility in the programmable parameters to allow for variations in MF R2 implementation from country to country The programmable parameters for MF R2 are separated into variables that apply to incoming calls when the Model 827 is receiving a call and outgoing calls when the Model 827 is initiating a call See Figure 6 12 below The M827BASE default parameters will work in any installation that conforms to the CCITT standard Some of the parameters are not necessary for the MF R2 signaling to work but fine tuning these parameters according to how MF R2 is implemented at the PSTN will make the MF R2 signaling more efficient by eliminating some of the MF R2
197. into the Model 827 Trunking Controller Refer to Figure 4 10 Refer to the appropriate telco installation step on page 4 18 to configure the Model 827 for the proper telephone line type Attach all cabling to rear of Unit Attach one of the following Telephone cables into J1 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface 709 7373 UK End to End Telephone Cable included in the 950 9640 e 709 7347 M827 UK 4 Wire Telephone Cable separately ordered as 950 9794 If using the 709 7347 cable install per Figure 4 8 If using the 709 7373 cable plug the end into the appropriate PSTN wall socket Apply power to Unit and perform setup as outlined in the Telephone on page 4 23 Upon successful completion of the setup procedure remove all cabling from the back of the Unit and install top cover and screws Re attach all cabling to the unit and apply power 4 20 Section 4 Installation TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS Refer to Figure 4 4 Table 4 3 and Table 4 4 NOTE Please Read Before Continuing The following procedures assume that the System Configuration switches on the Model 827 and the Model 827 Database Manager software have been set up as follows Model 827 Database Manager software is installed on a PC see Installation in Section 5 A site has been created in M827BASE This is done by selecting EDITISITE CONFIG and entering at a minimum a site number see Section 6 The RS 232 baud rate on the PC matches the baud rate set on
198. ired 4 Wire E amp M line selected Press the TAB key to turn on the provided tone Using a DVM monitor the differential voltage across the A and B lines from the PSTN Connect the two DVM leads between E1 and E5 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interconnect near telephone connector J1 Press the appropriate level keys to adjust the telephone audio output gain to give a reading of 150 mVrms on the DVM Using an Oscilloscope take a differential reading on the same output and verify the signal is a sine wave VOX Threshold and Decay The VOX is used to detect activity on landline calls as well as for intersite calls Typically the default values should allow the VOX to function properly but it is important that the VOX threshold and decay be adjusted correctly or calls may be disconnected unexpectedly The VOX threshold and decay values need to be adjusted on one unit only the selected values are transferred to all units at the site l VOX THRESHOLD To adjust the VOX sensitivity establish a telephone connection to one of the Model 827s at the site and enter the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELSI V Vox Thres menu with the desired line selected First verify that when silence is present on the line that the VOX indicator shows VOX is not detected If the indicator shows VOX is present adjust the VOX threshold until the indicator shows VOX is not detected Speak into the telephone at a normal level and verify that VOX is detected by observing the VOX indic
199. is valid on multiple sites to only be programmed once The sites that a particular unit is valid on are defined in a Roaming Class of Service which is then assigned to that unit In addition each unit is assigned privileges through a General Class of Service If a unit has not been assigned a General Class of Service they are given a default set of privileges which include the capability to make same fleet speech group and status calls with a fixed call limit of 60 seconds CALL TYPES The following call types are supported by the Model 827 Request Simple Calls Request Emergency Call Request Include Call Request Status Transaction SDM1 Request to Transmit Short Data Message SDM2 Request Call Diversion Abort Transaction RQS Request Simple Calls Individual and group single prefix interprefix and system wide ALLI normal and priority RQS speech and nonstandard data calls are supported For individual calls the availability of the called unit is determined before a traffic channel is allocated For group calls there is no availability check before a traffic channel is assigned Speech calls to a PSTN for both short and extended addressing are supported Tables of telephone numbers autodial tables can be entered and assigned to individuals The designated number from a user s assigned table is used when a PSTNSJj call request is received Extended and short addressing PABX calls are supported Short addressing PABX calls wil
200. istical information gathered is described in Appendix B 3 29 A INSTALLATION 4 1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL WARNINGS 4 GENERAL casos ned si SE a QU tuia de ded ed 4 e aste aee et OUO asa I KR P bU CU 4 Figures and Tables Used during 4 2 INSTALLATION 40 4 15 Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 sese 4 15 Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option 950 0002 4 19 Model 827 UK Telephone Interface Option 950 9640 4 19 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS ote ead ue uS 4 21 ctp bist de dote 4 21 PETE PHONG c 4 23 End to End or 2 Wire amp gode tenete e donde 4 24 s Acc M 4 25 VOX Threshold and 4 25 4 26 FINAL CHECKS BEFORE LEAVING THE SITE sss 4 26 OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS 4 27 INAASE OE DIFFICULTY d hia vas uiid Died dU 4 27 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE NOTES 4 28 INSTALLING NEW EPROM ety vite n M POE 4 29 FLASH MEMORY SOFTWARE 4 30 U
201. it hourly statistics sample B 5 unit number 6 27 units direct dial number 6 52 general class of service 6 52 member of fleet 6 51 number 6 51 priority 6 51 programming 6 50 use fixed call limits 6 42 user file record format A 7 fleet record A 7 header record A 7 unit record A 10 V voice and tone prompts 3 26 voice prompt programming 6 68 voice prompt programming access 6 71 ending a recording 6 72 tone prompt compatibility 6 70 tone prompts 6 74 voice prompt memory 6 71 voice prompts 6 8 6 68 commands 6 72 memory 6 70 programming 6 71 access 6 71 ending a recording 6 72 tone prompt compatibility 6 70 tone prompts 6 74 programming commands 6 72 prompt list 6 74 VOX threshold and decay 4 26 W wink complete time 6 21 wink duration 6 22 wink parameters 6 21 WT 6 17 Z Zetron European office 4 28 zone 6 13 zone data 6 13 I 8
202. itute Figure C 1 in Appendix C for Figure 4 3 4 4 87654321 J1 RJ45 Modular Connector 2 Wire 1 Not Used 5 Shunt 2 Not Used 6 PSINB 3 PSINA 7 Not Used 4 Not Used 8 Not Used 4 Wire 1 M Lead Return 5 4 Wire Transmit 2 M Lead 6 4 Wire Receive 3 4 Wire Receive 7 Lead 4 4 Wire Transmit 8 E Lead Return Figure 4 3 Model 827 Telephone Cable Connector Pinout Section 4 Installation SW1 SW2 1 4 TELCO Type 1 6 Unit ID Number 1 32 5 Multi Site Enable 7 Flash Memory Override 6 8 RS 232 Baud Rate 8 Modem Type The on label down position on the physical switches corresponds to a value of 0 Figure 4 4 System Configuration Switches 4 5 Section 4 Installation ON 5 oe 2 sense a SHSHSESHRASHLSRESHAOTAESSESHSFHESEEHED Figure 4 5 Model 827 Main Board Component Layout 024 0278A Section 4 Installation 7 ES see P4 2 aso eee ose je U JP7 wee 5 PS pees ssi s s ese 021 u22 023 24 125 U26 m e e x 99 o e 2 9
203. ize discounted long distance service fees where other Units would have to pay premium rates for long distance dialing A sample Dial Plan is shown in Figure 6 38 SITE DIAL PLAN SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 NO _Dialing Plan Name Plan Number 01 01 BASIC PLAN Plan Name BASIC Digit Plan LCR Num le 999 01 2 1 XXX XXX XXX 01 35 4 RT LCR Name Sx 01 LOCAL TRUNKS 6 7 8 95 HELP 103 Select item with arrow keys and ll press ENTER RETURN 12 Esc key exits 135 14 Del key deletes field and exits 15 16 Next Page Y EE NN Figure 6 38 Dial Plan Window 6 64 Section 6 System Programming Each Dial Plan consists of the following fields Plan Number The unique number assigned to this Dial Plan Plan Name The name assigned to this Dial Plan This field is optional but is useful for sorting and record keeping Digit Plan This field defines the patterns that the dialed number is compared against to determine which Least Cost Route to use The following characters define the digit plans specific digits lt space field delimiter 0orl X 0 9 1 9 N 2 9 7 lt One more digits to follow any digit Route Number This field defines which Least Cost Route should be used for each digit plan The least cost routes must be selected from the routes which have already been defined under SITE LEAST COST ROUTE
204. k telephone with the mouthpiece muffled Enter the COMM TELCO BALANCE LEVELS S Silence Setup menu and enter the silence number Hit ESC to exit Enter the COMM TELCO BALANCE LEVELS B Balance menu with the desired End to End or 2 Wire E amp M line selected The previous silence number entered is called automatically If the number called is a PSTN silence number it is answered automatically and the test will proceed without further attention from the user If the number called is to another telephone on the PSTN then the user must ensure it is answered and the mouthpiece muffled for the balancing to be effective Once the test call is answered the Model 827 will automatically balance the hybrid and return the R and C values when finished Test duration is about one minute Press ENTER to exit When hybrid balancing is complete the lower case b under the ADJ COMPLETED column will become an upper case Note The line to be balanced must be in the FREE STATE before starting 2 AUDIO LEVEL FROM PHONE To adjust the audio level from the phone establish a phone connection to the Model 827 and enter the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELSI F Audio Frm Ph menu with the desired End to End or 2 wire E amp M line selected While speaking into the telephone in a normal voice press the appropriate level keys to adjust the telephone audio input gain to give level bar graph reading no greater than 10 to 9 3 AUDIO LEVEL TO PHONE T
205. l 5 27 tests and adjustments COR threshold 4 22 discriminator input 4 22 FFSK encode 4 22 radio 4 21 repeat audio 4 23 squelch level 4 23 telephone 2 wire E amp M 4 25 end to end 4 25 telephone 2 wire audio level from phone 4 25 audio level to phone 4 25 telephone 4 wire audio level from phone 4 26 audio level to phone 4 26 transmit audio 4 22 VOX decay 4 26 VOX threshold 4 26 timeout answer 6 43 clear down 6 16 data call inactivity 6 19 group answer 6 16 TA 6 15 Index TJ 6 15 TP 6 15 TW 6 16 voice call inactivity 6 18 toll restrict COS 6 66 toll restrict COS 6 56 6 59 6 67 tone prompt compatibility 6 70 traffic channel allocation 3 6 include call 3 9 nonstandard data call 3 10 operation 3 8 parameters 6 17 selection 6 16 speech and telephone interconnect calls 3 9 traffic channel statistics B 2 bit pair error corrections B 3 inbound calls B 3 interconnect port disabled due to error B 3 messages not decodable w SYNT B 3 messages received B 3 messages transmitted B 3 one bit error corrections B 3 outbound calls B 3 seconds active on call B 2 seconds busy B 3 seconds clearing down calls B 3 seconds cross busied B 3 seconds idle B 2 seconds indisabled state B 4 seconds processing outbound calls B 3 seconds receiver was B 3 total calls B 3 trunk group default 6 57 trunk group 6 26 6 58 6 59 6 64 type 1 6 38 U UK telco option installation 4 18 un
206. l be routed to an available telco port which is programmed to be connected to a PABX and the programmed PABX Id matches that designated by FLAGI FLAG2 of the RQS request For all call requests to the PSTN or a PABX once the initiating user is determined to be allowed to make the requested call type and both an outgoing line and a traffic channel are available the call will be allocated PSTN and PABX originated calls are also supported and are described PSTN PABX to Radio Calls on page 3 16 RQS Request Include Calls Individual and group single prefix interprefix normal and priority RQS speech and nonstandard data calls are supported Section 3 Operation RQE Request Emergency Call Individual and group single prefix interprefix and system wide ALLI emergency speech and nonstandard data calls are supported Depending on the system configuration an emergency call could result in the interruption of a call already in progress if no resources of the desired type are available In such cases the oldest non emergency call in progress with the desired resources will be preempted Emergency calls to the PSTN or a PABX are also supported RQQ Request Status Transaction SDM1 Both short and extended address RQQ messages are supported Only pre defined status values are supported for messages from a radio unit to the controller Status messages intended for other radio units are passed on regardless of the status value If
207. lance levels option to balance the hybrid for 2 wire telephone interfaces and set all the necessary audio levels for the telephone interface For more information about setting telephone levels and balancing the hybrid please see Tests and Adjustments Telephone in Section 4 A sample of the Telco Balance levels screen is shown in Figure 5 15 5 24 Section 5 Getting Started COMM TELCO BALANCE LEVELS SUPERVISOR mode Hybrid Balance Monitor Site 001 LN STATUS TY HYBRID BALANCE AND LEVEL SETTINGS ADJ COMPLETED 01 Line 05 TYPE EndToE STAT FREE 02 03 BUSY End Select from highlighted 04 B Balance K FFSK Out Gain 05 FREE End Te Pla R Repeat Audio 06 weite Pin 5 C COR Threshold 07 FREE End V Vox Thres Q Squelch Level 08 D Vox Decay H Hangup 09 BUSY End U E amp MAW Microwv S Silence Setup 10 I Radio In Gain ESC to quit 11 O Radio Out Gain 12 l3 Choice 14 15 16 32 HELP FILE enter ESC to exit Figure 5 15 Telco Balance and Levels Other The Other option will pop up the menu screen shown in Figure 5 16 5 25 Section 5 Getting Started M827 Database Manager V2 30 c 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode OTHER MENU _ Set Clear Reset Retriev Authorize _ Time Password Modem string HELP STATUS Sel
208. le it will be allocated immediately and the calling party will hear the call is being connected prompt followed by ringing The control channel will then check the availability of the called unit and whether it will accept the call or not If the unit is either not available or chooses not to accept the call the calling party will be informed and the call will be disconnected If an individual is not programmed for Full Off Air Call Setup The calling party will hear the Thank you ringing prompt followed by ringing The control channel will check the availability of the radio If the radio responds to the availability check the control channel will attempt to allocate a traffic channel If none are available and traffic channel queuing is enabled the call will be queued If no channels become available before the queue timer or no answer timeout expires the call will be disconnected Once a channel is available the called unit will be sent to that channel The calling party will continue to hear ringing until an 3 16 Section 3 Operation Off Hook is received from the radio unit or the ringout timer expires If the ringout timer expires the calling party will hear the No Answer prompt and the call will be disconnected PSTN PABX Overdial Speech Calls For incoming calls from the PSTN or a PABX which require the calling party to overdial the following modes are supported 1 Direct dial access to individual numbers using th
209. ling M827BASE the program defaults to full user access which is noted in the upper right corner as SUPERVISOR mode This message is displayed to warn you that you have complete access to M827BASE CAUTION After the initial installation of M827BASE anyone who has access to the program will have full supervisor access Additionally if someone has access to this manual they can also change all levels of passwords It is a good idea to assign passwords to avoid being locked out of M827BASE either accidentally or deliberately If a lock out should occur see Restoring Passwords on page 5 36 M827BASE remains in the supervisor mode until Shift F9 is pressed passwords are assigned and M827BASE is restarted Figure 5 20 shows the Password Entry screen before any passwords have been assigned The Shift F9 to get the Password Entry screen is only available from the Main Menu bar in M827BASE SITE S ITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode Passwords Level Password d 2 e 5 4 Enter the number of the level Enter a level number if you wish to you wish to change _ change the corresponding password Enter escape or return to exit 1 Edit all except users 2 Edit Users 3 Accounting call accum etc 4 Supervisor Full access p J Figure 5 20 Password Entry Screen first time access 5 32 Section 5 Getting Started Lev
210. lls n standard data calls for traffic annels Default Y Dynamic Call Limit Thresholds Busy Overload Traffic Queue Full 050 075 Call Limit Reduction 025 02 00 Telco Queue Full 050 075 Call Limit Reduction 025 02 00 Figure 6 7 MPT1327 Configuration Queuing Window Dynamic Call Limit Thresholds The Dynamic Call Limit Thresholds allow the maximum length of a call to be adjusted depending upon how full the queue is This allows call limits to be dynamically applied to calls when the system is busy to improve queue through put this gives more users a chance to use the resources by reducing the amount of time each user can keep a resource busy Traffic Telco Queue Full The Traffic Telco Queue Full field determines how full the queue must be before it has reached the Busy state and the Overload state Call Limit Reduction Once the queue has reached the programmed percentage of fullness the rule in the Call Limit Reduction field is applied to the call limit for new calls allocated a resource In the Busy state new calls have their call limit reduced by a percentage In the Overload state new calls are given a fixed call limit which is the minimum of the Overload time and the actual call limit time Also refer to Call Queuing in Section 3 6 14 Section 6 System Programming MPT1327 Parameters The window displayed in Figure 6 8 contains timeouts and other parameters specific to the
211. ls Failed Party Unavailable 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Busy 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Calls Failed Party Timed Out 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Active as Control Channel 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call 00 00 00 00 10 00 26 00 42 00 47 36 Time Idle 00 00 00 00 50 00 34 00 18 00 12 24 Time Busy 00 00 00 00 10 00 26 00 42 00 47 36 Total Calls 00000 00000 00003 00024 00060 00160 Time Clearing Down Calls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Messages Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time RX Jammed 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Cross Busied 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Inbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Outbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Outbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 B 5 Appendix B Statistics Files EET 5 Statistics for Unit 3 Time of Day 6AM 8AM 9AM 10AM 11AM CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 XBusy Slots
212. me Busy 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Total Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Clearing Down Calls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Messages Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time RX Jammed 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Cross Busied 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Inbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Outbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Outbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 B 9 Appendix B Statistics Files ee ok ok ask ask ok Yesterday s Statistics for Unit 3 Time of Day CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed XBusy Slots Txed Frames Txed Withdrawn Slots Good Responses Bit Errors Bit Pair Errors Not Decodable w SYNC Empty Slots Message Not Allowed Invalid Message Rx Out of Slot Successful Registrations Registration Attempts Successful Status Calls Status Call Attempts Successful SDM2 Calls SDM2 Call Attempts Successful Simple Calls Simple Call Attempts Successful Emer Calls Emer Call Attempts Calls Queued gt 10secs Calls Queued 30s
213. meters 1 ECHOALL END 2 END ECHO 35 ECHOALL 4 DIAL 5 PAUSE 6 DETECT 7 DTMF 8 MF 9 PULSE 10 LTs 12 Del key deletes field and exits Figure 6 35 Outdial Table The following commands are available to define the OutDial programs ECHO Notes 1 Digit Fields are separated by spaces Hyphen characters 2 Digit Plan letter variables used in this example are explained in detail in Dial Plan starting on page 5 72 6 60 Dial out a field from the digit plan Each dialing plan starts with field 0 Note the digit plan is programmed as part of the Dialing Plan Data Screen EXAMPLES NXX XXXX ECHO 1 would dial Ee Field 1 of the Digit Plan Field 0 of the Digit Plan 1 NAX NXX XXXX ECHO 1 would dial NAX NC ECHOALL would dial NXX XXXX Field 3 of the Digit Plan Field 2 of the Digit Plan Field 1 of the Digit Plan Field 0 of the Digit Plan e 0 are not accepted Section 6 System Programming ECHOALL Dial out all remaining digit fields in the digit pattern There are no parameters for this field This command will echo all the digit fields in the digit plan unless this command is preceded by an ECHO command Note in Example 2 above that the ECHO 1 command dials out digit field 1 followed by the ECHOALL command dialing out the subsequent digit fields fields 2 and 3 DIAL Dial out up to 18 digits specified in the parameter field
214. mple of the available fields COS GENERAL SUPERVISOR mode INDEX GENERAL COS COS Class Name COS Number 01 01 STANDARD CLASS COS Name STANDARD CLASS Allow Incoming from Phone N Allow to Phone INTER FLEET Group Calls Allowed Simple Y Priority N Emergency N Individual Calls Allowed Simple Y Priority N Emergency HELP Enter Y if same fleet simple group Non Prescribed Data Call Allowed calls are allowed Simple Y Priority N Emergency Status Calls Allowed Y Short Data Calls Allowed to Individuals N Groups N Self Divert N Third Party Divert N Include Calls Y Figure 6 25 General COS Inter Fleet Window 6 45 Section 6 System Programming SDM2 Parameters The SDM2 Parameters window allows setting Short Data Message privileges See Figure 6 26 for an example of the available fields COS GENERAL SUPERVISOR mode INDEX GENERAL COS COS Class Name COS Number 01 01 STANDARD CLASS COS Name STANDARD CLASS Allow Incoming from Phone N Allow to Phone Outgoing Y Emergency Y Autodial N Use Fixed Speech Call Limit N Use Fixed Phone Call Limit Y Data Call Limit Time 05 00 Use Full Off Air Call Setup for HELP Individual Calls N Phone N Enter Y if multiple segment SDM2 transactions are allowed No Answer Timeout
215. n selected the radio unit s individual ident will be sent Group Answer Timeout The Group Ans Time out field sets the amount of time the traffic channel will wait for a member of a called group to keyup in response to an incoming call from the PSTN or PABX Group GTC Rate The Group GTC Rate sets the interval at which GTC messages are sent on the control channel for group calls The repeated GTC messages allow members of a group who have recently entered an area or turned on their radios to join a group call while it is in progress Clear Down The Clear Down field sets the maximum time a Model 827 will attempt to clear down a call while the COR input is still active If this timer expires the channel will be set to a JAMMED state and will not be available for allocation The channel will become available again if the COR signal is inactive for the Repeater Jammed Reset Time programmed in the Site Config 6 16 Section 6 System Programming Max Units Wait for Response WT The Max units wait for response WT field controls the number of slots the radio unit expects to wait for a response from the control channel A value of 0 7 must be entered in this field with 0 0 slots 1 1 slot 2 2 slots 3 3 slots 4 4 slots 5 5 slots 6 10 slots and 7 15 slots Can Control Channel Become Traffic Can Control channel become Traffic determines whether a control channel will be used as traffic when all available channel
216. n Ett 5 3 Remote Internal e eai esaet Wade iue e en acus 5 5 Remote External Modem Link eite ti deo eite toes to Poetas esee e 5 10 Multi site programming using Intersite 1 6 2 5 14 GETTING atem ede 5 14 the OLE W ALE so euasit epe eet 5 14 Keyboard Command S e UR UR DRE 5 14 Nen sehe atit ut asi Ed 5 16 Edit Men Selections eausa usu 5 17 Indes VV I Wy 5 18 COMM Menu Selections ea orn dut esa e Mogunt 5 18 Bari 5 19 dedo aea 5 20 Channel Monitor 5 20 Telco MORBIOF sti det e i De tard uia 5 21 UALS Info pei 5 22 5 23 Repeater MM 5 23 Balance Levels aiu iter iac et a Lor dece de 5 24 MP X 5 25 FILE Menu 5 29 edt io dee sad LE 5 29 5 29 E M M M CP 5 30 OTHER Menu Selec HOS saciid diced ER Sed a ues ae 5 31 PASSWORDS NA estos te e tete Ses ct 5 32 us Dedi ertet feto ate oad 5 33 Assigni
217. n JP2 This activates the Transmit Out High signal only when PTT is active 4 TRANSMITTER AUDIO OUTPUT Connect pin 4 TX Out High and pin 5 TX Out Low to the differential line input of the transmitter The transmitter and Model 827 settings must be matched for proper operation of the system First adjust the transmitter for maximum allowed deviation typically 2 55 kHz using the deviation pot in the radio as described in the radio s manual Second configure the Model 827 output to match the transmitter used JP5 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller has two settings position A transmitter requires a pre emphasized input position B transmitter requires a flat input Third configure the Model 827 FFSK output to match the transmitter used Set jumper JP11 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller to position A transmitter requires a flat input position B transmitter requires a pre emphasized input In addition if a combined audio and FFSK signal is desired add a jumper to position C of JP11 If separate audio and FFSK outputs are desired see step 5 Refer to Figure 4 9 and Table 4 5 5 SEPARATE FFSK OUTPUT If supported by the transmitter a separate FFSK output is provided on the Model 827 If desired connect pins 10 FFSK Out High and 11 FFSK Out Low to the differential FFSK input of the transmitter Verify that jumper JP11 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller has only one jumper installed in
218. n a hazard and will invalidate the BABT approval WARNING The analogue telecommunications interface is intended to be connected to telecommunications network voltage TNV circuits which may carry dangerous voltages The telephone cord must remain disconnected from the telecommunications system until the card has been installed within a host that provides the necessary protection of the operator If it is subsequently desired to open the host equipment for any reason the telephone cord must be disconnected before effecting access to any internal parts that may carry telecommunications network voltages 1 Remove all cabling and power from the back of the Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 2 Remove top cover from Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 3 Observe approved ESD safety procedure and remove the 702 9758 Telephone Interface board from the 10x15 anti static packing bag in the 950 9640 4 19 Section 4 Installation 4 10 Insert J3 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interface into P5 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller Securely attach to the chassis using the six screws provided Refer to Figure 4 10 Remove the Processor Board 702 9746 from the Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 Next remove the four SRAM ICs 321 1001 from the enclosed IC tube and install into sockets U42 through U45 on the Trunking Controller Board 702 9745 Install the Processor Board back
219. n be programmed to set a channel to disabled for a specified amount of time 0 60 seconds after power up Sense Alarms The Model 827 has three external analog to digital 0 to 5 volt inputs Examples of how these might be programmed are shown in Figure 6 17 Enter a Y in the Edit Sense Alarms field to access the related window INDEX SITE 001 RP Chan Unit Number 01 01 1000 SENSE ALARMS 03 0003 Sense 1 Enable Y 04 0004 Set Output N Report Y Auto Clear N 05 0002 Check on PTT Only Y Disable Rptr Y Valid Range Low 0 0 High 4 0 Status to transmit to Radio Unit for Low for High 10 Sense 2 Enable N Set Output N Report N Auto Clear N Check on PTT Only N Disable Rptr N HELP Valid Range Low 0 0 High 0 5 Enter Y to enable the Alarm for Status to transmit to Radio Unit this sense Input for Low 06 for High 07 Sense 3 Enable Y Set Output Y Report Y Auto Clear N Check on PTT Only Y Disable Rptr N Valid Range Low 1 26 High 5 0 Status to transmit to Radio Unit for Low 05 for High Figure 6 17 Repeater Sense Alarms Window 6 29 Section 6 System Programming Enable The Enable field allows a particular sense input to be monitored for alarm conditions by entering a Y in this field If N is entered in this field then the sense input is not monitored and the settings of the subsequent fields are ignored Set Output Each Sense input
220. n or additional menu for the item selected will be displayed After the selected operation is complete you will be given the chance to select other options from the Comm submenu without disconnecting 5 18 Section 5 Getting Started M827 Database Manager V2 30 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode _ Site COS Units Comm File otHer Update Retrieve Billing Channel Monitor Telco Monitor Status info Statistics Repeater levels Telco Balance levels Other HELP Select item with arrow keys and ENTER or capital letter ESC to quit Set repeater levels Figure 5 9 Comm Menu Options Only one PC connection to a site or other data bus intensive activity is allowed at any one time If another PC connection is in progress or database or voice prompt cloning is in progress the connection will be locked out If this happens the STATUS window will display a message stating that the PC is locked out and whether database cloning is in progress or another PC connection is in progress Update The update operation will allow you to either send the entire database to the site or you may select an individual database to update from any of the Site COS or Units submenus A sample Update Pop up menu is shown in Figure 5 10 Note Update Site Config updates the Site Config MPT1327 Parameters and the Country data These three items are bundled together so only the Site Config selection appears
221. nactivity Time sets the maximum time that no activity refer to Voice Call Activity Indicators above can be detected on a traffic channel before the call will be cleared down Data Call Activity Indicators The COR switch enables the use of COR to detect the presence of activity on a traffic channel during a data call If is entered a window will pop up containing the Max 6 18 Section 6 System Programming Data Transmit Time which sets the maximum continuous time a mobile is allowed to transmit during a data call If this time expires the call will be dropped Max Data Call Inactivity Time The Max Data Call Inactivity time sets the maximum time that no activity can be detected on a traffic channel before the call will be cleared down Enable PRESSEL On The Enable PRESSEL On fields determine if radio units will be requested by the system to send PRESSEL On messages at the start of each speech item it transmits PRESSEL On messages can be enabled or disabled for Simple Group or PSTN calls separately At the start of each call the control channel will send a broadcast message BCAST indicating to the radio units if PRESSEL On messages should be sent for that call Send Selective Clear The Send Selective Clear field programs the traffic channel to send a MAINT Selective Clear message at the start of each call This message will clear any unwanted radio units from the traffic channel before the new conversation begins Note
222. naling required to set up calls is done on a control channel Up to 24 channels can be trunked on any one site The Model 827 is a compact one unit high 19 inch rack mountable product Each Model 827 in a system is connected directly to its host repeater enabling it to be integrated with repeaters from a range of manufacturers The Model 827 controllers in a single site are linked together through a 64 Kbit PCM audio bus and two RS 485 data buses which are bundled into one cable System control data is passed between the trunking controllers through the data buses see Figure 3 1 One Model 827 at the repeater site becomes the communication bus master and controls the communication between the trunking controllers When a new system is powered on or units are added to an existing system a unit will first look for the presence of an existing master unit if none is seen then it will start a procedure to determine if it should become the master unit Repeater E to E E amp M 2 or 4 Wire Repeater Daisy Model827 Channel 3 Chained 596999 O OOC PCM Audio and Serial Data e Model 827 Channel 24 4 O OOO e l Figure 3 1 Model 827 System Configuration 3 1 Section 3 Operation Optionally each Model 827 Controller may be fitted with a telephone interface Any radio channel has access to any telephone port via the PCM audio bus regardless of which unit the telephone port is installed in see Figure 3 1 Up
223. nd Roaming Class of Service The Groups database allows groups to be defined and assigned to a fleet and given a group number within the fleet The Autodial Table database allows pre arranged PSTN destinations to be programmed into the system Each Unit in the system can be assigned an Autodial Table to use SITE CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING A new or blank Site Config data window contains default values that generally apply to all situations Please refer to Figure 6 1 for a sample window The fields that are highlighted are fields that must be programmed with information specific to the site being defined The highlighted fields as well as others are discussed below Please refer to the on screen HELP window for information on fields that are not discussed below 6 2 Section 6 System Programming SITE SITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE CONFIG Site Site Name Country Site Number 001 001 LOCAL SITE UK Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access O Comm Port 1 Set M827 time from PC time Y Modem access number 0008888 Repeater Jammed reset time 02 Emerg calls demand resources Y Emerg call time limit 05 00 Report Alarms to Radio Y Repeat alarm 002 Internal 020 HELP Country UK Enter the amount of time the COR Signal must be INACTIVE on a repeater Edit in the JAMMED state before that Call Parms Y Schedule Y repeater is available again for Prom
224. ndividual Number c cccccccccsssessssececececeesesensececeseeeesesessseceseceeseeeneas 6 49 Fleet Customer Information for 6 49 UNEFS PROGRAMMING c ib et odo ea 6 50 Member of Fleet ideo erga ede 6 51 Umt itc sedere desint Sh 6 51 Ys sot ue UE M RA eM IDE 6 51 Contents continued Direct Dial INBniDef s testes petito 6 52 General Class Of Service 6 52 GROUPS PROGRAMIUMINQG aic tetas Lora ER EE AVR ERU PER E UR UR 6 52 Member of e qe arts geo ncaa uous aso is eu ts ec i ido dun ha 6 53 N MD T m P 6 53 Hable Late 6 53 Jom Existing M 6 53 Allow Incoming from 6 54 Play Alert Tones for Incoming Phone 6 54 Include these Sites in Group Call eite eet ne etd eet tnn 6 54 AUTODIAL TABLE 6 55 LEAST COST ROUTBPROGRAMNIINGI 6 56 Roulm Example teet a hela eat ot INN 6 56 Default Trunk tion e 6 57 Advanced Multi site Least Cost
225. ng Pass WOLUS te o etii test taut ides 5 35 MSI Pass adu Mtm etui 5 35 PASS WODUOSG Sedis DE a du MeL etc 5 36 6 SYSTEM PROGRAMM ENG rin RR 6 1 Contents continued DATABASE OVERVIEW edu 6 1 SITE CONFIGURATION 22 2 0000000000 000000000004 6 2 Site acest T 6 3 Sale 6 3 Set M827 Time from so e 6 3 Modem Access INUIDE a eit eee ERIS eS RSEN itir Ede ca RR dde 6 4 Repeater Jammed Reset ee ore e UR Ronda 6 4 Emergency Calls Demand 6 4 Emergency Call Time Emitte sett re epa ee PR enda 6 4 Report Alarms to 6 4 Repeat H 6 5 bas onse Ao e dO E 6 5 Call Parameters eon 6 5 E amp M Number to Access Overdial Prompt esses 6 6 Disconnect on Call Progress Tone s er er aos 6 6 Minimum Speech PSTN Call Length to Store 6 6 Store Call Detail Records 6 6 Lead Digit to Designate Direct Dial Access 6 6 Number of Digits to
226. nking 2 3 LED indicators 2 4 physical 2 1 radio 2 1 radio interface 2 1 real time clock 2 4 telephone interface 2 2 start supervision seek time 6 38 station ID 6 28 call sign 6 28 interval 6 28 statistics 3 29 See M827BASE comm menu statistics rollover 5 27 store call detail records 6 6 system identity 6 12 system loading sample B 13 system priority 6 7 system programming 4 27 system type 6 12 T target frames per burst 6 28 telco led 4 29 telco line type 6 33 telco port E amp M 6 36 base DID adder and range 6 39 connect time required 6 38 delay before dialout 6 39 incoming signaling type 6 38 number of feed digits 6 38 start supervision seek time 6 38 supervision types 6 37 type 1 6 38 end to end connect time required 6 35 Index delay before dialout 6 35 delay before prompt 6 34 dial click mode 6 36 dialtone required 6 35 disconnect on battery 6 34 minimum onhook time 6 35 rings until answer 6 35 end to end type 6 33 line type 6 33 unit number 6 33 telco ports allow calls 6 40 auto balance hybrids 6 39 enable disconnect 6 41 incoming call mode 6 40 interdigit timeout 6 41 line connects to 6 41 trunk group 6 41 voice prompts 6 40 telco supervision types 6 37 telephone line types See line types telephone interconnect least cost routing 3 14 toll restriction 3 14 telephone interconnect statistics B 3 seconds processing inbound calls B 3 terminate cal
227. nnel cyclic dwell time 6 17 operation 3 4 operation mode 6 17 revert to traffic 6 17 control channel statistics B 1 bit pair error corrections B 1 calls canceled by originating party B 2 calls failed due to called party busy B 2 calls failed due to called party unavailable B 2 calls failed due to time out B 2 calls queued for resources for more than 10 seconds B 2 calls queued for resources for more than 30 seconds B 2 cross busy slots transmitted B 1 emergency call attempts B 2 empty slots B 1 frames transmitted B 1 good responses B 1 invalid message B 1 message not allowed in slot B 1 message not decodable w SYNC B 1 message received outside slot timing boundaries B 1 one bit error corrections B 1 registration attempts B 1 50 2 call attempts B 2 simple call attempts B 2 slots transmitted B 1 status call attempts B 2 successful emergency call setups B 2 successful registrations B 1 successful SDM2 calls B 2 successful simple call setups B 2 successful status calls B 2 withdrawn slots transmitted B 1 COR led 4 29 thresholds active inactive 6 20 COS general 6 41 allow all call 6 43 allow intersite 6 43 call diversion parameters 6 47 data call limit time 6 43 full duplex 6 43 full off air call setup 6 43 inter fleet calls 6 45 noanswer timeout 6 43 same fleet calls 6 44 SDM2 parameters 6 46 units 6 52 use fixed call limits 6 42 country 6 5 country data cadence table 6 23
228. nnel while the alarm condition is present Entering a Y is this field means the Model 827 will be disabled during an alarm condition Valid Range The Model 827 sense inputs can sense from 0 to 5 volts the valid range for the sense input is entered in the Valid Range fields The lowest valid voltage level is entered in the Low field and the highest valid voltage level is entered in the High field If the sense input drops below the Lowest valid level or goes above the Highest valid level an alarm condition will occur 6 30 Section 6 System Programming Status to Transmit to Radio Unit The Status to transmit to Radio Unit fields are used when reporting an alarm condition to a radio unit Two status values can be entered one for when the sense input drops below the valid range and one for when the sense input rises above the valid range These status values would be sent in a status message to the alarm report radio when an alarm condition occurs The Report field must be set to Y and the Alarms reported to field in Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 must set up to report alarms to a radio unit Below are a couple of examples related to Figure 6 17 illustrating the use of the alarm monitoring feature of the Model 827 Example 1 The System Operator wishes to monitor each transmitter for high VSWR and disable the repeater when it occurs The System Operator has a VSWR sensor installed on each transmitter output After installation it was determ
229. nsmitter e COR Lights when carrier is detected by the Model 827 e Alarm Lights when any alarm condition has been detected e Bus Lights when frame sync is detected on the PCM bus On the bus master the LED will blink twice per second On a slave unit the LED should be lit continuously Block LED e Element 1 Telco Vox Lights when VOX is detected from the telephone port e Element 2 FFSK Air Modem RX Lights when FFSK data is being received over the air from the radio units e Element 3 FFSK Air Modem TX Lights when FFSK data is being transmitted over the air to the radio units e Element 4 Subscriber Bus Poll Lights when the unit is being polled on the subscriber bus 3 2 Section 3 Operation MODEL 827 FRONT PANEL MULTISITE ENABLED REPEATER BUS SYNC SUBSCRIBER BUS POLL FFSK AIR MODEM TX FFSK AIR MODEM RX TELCO VOX Figure 3 2 Model 827 Front Panel 3 3 Section 3 Operation Element 5 Repeater Bus Sync Lights when the unit is receiving sync on the repeater bus Element 6 Multi site Enabled Lights when this unit is enabled for multi site operation e Element 7 Telco FFSK Rx Lights when FFSK data is being received over the intersite link e Element 8 Telco FFSK Tx Lights when FFSK data is being transmitted over the intersite link Element 9 Telco Modem Use Lights when the internal Bell CCITT modem is in use Element 10 Telco Lights
230. ntroller to position B Set jumper JP13 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller to select the COR polarity position A is for negative lo carrier position B is for positive hi carrier COR The COR operation will be verified and adjusted during the Test and Adjustment portion of this procedure Internal COR The Model 827 has an internal noise detector circuit for COR indication This circuit can be used if a good COR signal cannot be found in the radio This circuit requires high frequencies above 6 kHz to work which means discriminator audio To use the internal COR set jumper JP6 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller to position A Also on the same board JP13 should be in the A position The squelch level of the internal COR circuit will be adjusted for proper COR indication during the Test and Adjustment portion of this procedure Summary JP6 COR source A Internal COR JP13 COR polarity A Negative for internal COR 8 PCM CABLE For sites where multiple Model 827 units are to be trunked together use the PCM cable e 1 meter 709 7428 included with each Model 827 2 meter 709 7390 must be ordered separately to interconnect the units Locate the PCM DATA BUS port on the back of the Model 827 and screw in the PCM cable connector Attach the other end of the same cable to a second Model 827 in a similar manner If more than two Model 827s are to be interconnected screw in another PCM cable in a piggy back fas
231. nts the mobile from ping ponging between sites when in range of more than one site Secondary Registration Timeout The Secondary Registration Timeout field will pop up when is entered in the Allow Secondary Registration Field This field determines the amount of time a secondary registration will stay in effect The time entered must be between 5 and 70 minutes and will be rounded to the nearest 5 minutes Intersite Queue Timeout The Intersite Queue Timeout field sets the maximum time in minutes and seconds that a multi site call will remain in the intersite queue The maximum time the field can be programmed to is 15 minutes seconds Edit Network Route Table Use the Network Route Table only if your M827s and M844s have main firmware versions prior to 2 30 otherwise enter your multi site routes in the NETWORK database under the SITE main menu Site The Site field on each line of the networking table allows up to twelve sites to be specified that the selected site has been linked to The site number of a connected site should be selected from the programmed sites to be entered in this field Serial Number The Serial field on each line of the networking table specifies the unit number of the serial link connected to the site specified in the Site field If no serial link is being used this field must be left blank or a value of zero entered 6 9 Section 6 System Programming Serial B
232. o Landline 81 Landline to Mobile 82 Landline to Diverted Mobile Multisite call types are summarized in Table A 2 on page 4 Status Char 1 C Call Complete E Error Month in mm dd format 01 12 Start Time Time call started in hours and minutes HH MM Site Num 3 For single site calls the number of the site this call took place on For multisite calls the number of the site this record was stored on Channel assigned for this call blank if not used Party Type Char 1 Individual G Group Group Call Type Char 1 If party type this field is blank If party type G then B Broadcast C Conference Call Priority Char 1 N Normal call P Priority call E Emergency call A 2 Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 1 Call Detail Record Fields Continued Field Name Type Length Description Speech or Data Char 1 S Speech call D Data call Calling Unit Prefix and ident of calling unit in the following format Diverted Unit where PPP 3 digit prefix 4 digit ident This field is blank for landline to mobile calls unless the called unit has been diverted then it contains the prefix and ident of the diverted unit Called Unit Group Prefix and ident of called unit or group in the following format PPP 3 digit prefix 4 digit ident This field is blank for registration and mobile to landline calls Destination Indicates if the destination of a mobile t
233. o adjust the audio level to the phone establish a phone connection to the Model 827 and enter the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELSI T Audio To Ph menu with the desired End to End or 2 Wire E amp M line selected Press the TAB key to turn on the provided tone Using a DVM monitor the differential voltage across the A and B lines from the PSTN Connect the two DVM leads between E3 and E7 on board 702 9758 Telephone Interconnect near telephone connector J1 Press the appropriate level keys to adjust the telephone audio output gain to give a reading of 190 mVrms 4 24 Section 4 Installation on the DVM Using an Oscilloscope take a differential reading on the same output and verify the signal is a sine wave 4 Wire For the Model 827 Canadian Telephone Interface Option please use the 4 wire information in section Appendix C in place of step 1 below l AUDIO LEVEL FROM PHONE To adjust the audio level from the phone establish a phone connection to the Model 827 and enter the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELSI F Audio Frm Ph menu with the desired 4 wire E amp M line selected While speaking into the telephone in a normal voice press the appropriate level keys to adjust the telephone audio input gain to give a level bar graph reading no greater than 12 to 11 AUDIO LEVEL TO PHONE To adjust the audio level to the phone establish a phone connection to the Model 827 and enter the COMMITELCO BALANCE LEVELSI T Audio To Ph menu with the des
234. o landline call is P PSTN X PABX This field is blank for all other call types Telco line used for this call Blank for non interconnect Line Number Num 2 calls Dialed Number or Number dialed for mobile to landline calls or listing of sites included in a up to six sites included in a multisite group call multisite group call Call Termination and Error Codes Positive values indicate a completed call negative values an error condition See Table A 3 and Table A 4 for values Table A 2 lists the values that may appear in the Record Type field A 3 Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 2 Values for Record Type Field Type Description Type Description Basic Call Records Initiating Site Multisite Information Records 1 status A1 land to mobile call 2 mobile to landline 4 land to group call 80 Home Site Multisite Records A6 group call moie to mobile ca mobile to land call Intermediate Site Multisite Information Records 92 mobile to group call land to group call individual call group call 95 mobile to mobile status call FF date record 96 mobile to mobile SDM2 call Table A 3 and Table A 4 list the different values that may appear in the Status field Table A 3 Call Completion Codes for Status Field Code Description Code Description 1 Mobile disconnected call Activity time out 2 Battery loss detected Calling disconnect
235. o s home site The home site updates its record for the user and makes the new site the primary site If secondary registration is NOT enabled the old primary site is notified that the mobile is no longer registered there and no information is stored in the secondary site field at the home site If secondary registration is enabled then the old primary site is moved to the secondary site field and the old secondary site is notified that the mobile is no longer there At this point the home site will send the new registration information to all the sites it knows of in its network table The secondary site information will remain in the home site s database until the Secondary Registration Timeout has expired see Site ConfiglNetwork programming When the secondary registration times out the secondary site will be notified that the mobile is no longer registered there and then all the sites the home site knows of in it s network table will be updated with the new registration information In this manner all sites in the network are kept informed of the location of all radios For calls made to a user not registered at a site the initiating site will proceed with the registration information it currently has for the called unit and simultaneously request current location information from the called user s home site If the home site returns conflicting information the initiating site will change its coarse of action In this manner the ou
236. oW dlicens tied tese iti deiecti e EP aa ie 5 18 COMM Menu 5 18 Upd t toltedes 5 19 Retrieve Billing 5 20 Channel 5 20 Telco st iss iicet iti eese it e Et tss 5 21 Status Info os ee Oe A AD 5 22 SEatiStICS ie tsi eset ie us retos ies 5 23 Repeater 5 23 Telco Balance Levels ccccccccccccssssssssscecesccecesssssaecececceseeessnseaeeesees 5 24 n bets tis 5 25 os eres ces cte en UN etn 5 26 Clear Submenu 5 27 Reset Submenu aeu 5 27 Retrieve esses 5 27 Authorize 5 28 FILE Men Selections rte RT TEE 5 29 Pinto CEPR ORE EON IUCR AI M 5 29 a tte a es cd EE 5 29 SMO b amete i 5 30 OTHER Menu Sel ctions no reto t re Dr debite 5 31 PASSWORDS edt tum UN Em EE 5 32 Levels of Securityn 5 33 Assigning 5 35 Using Pass TUUM 5 35 Restoring Pass Words Ju eese SIT Ur ak o SR Pede oe I VER 5 36 5 GETTING STARTED
237. oding reliability E amp M Telco The window displayed in Figure 6 21 shows parameters that must be programmed for each telco port that are specific to E amp M type telephone circuits The parameters that apply mainly to E amp M type lines will be explained in more detail 6 36 Section 6 System Programming SITE TELCO PORTS INDEX TD U 01 E Y A A A I L HELP T Select the supervision type for incoming calls Enter I for Immediate Start W for Wink Start SUPERVISOR mode SITE 001 nit Number 01 ine Type M Disable Port Y E amp M Supervision Type Incoming Calls I Outgoing Calls I Dialout Mode D Incoming Signaling Type D E amp M Type 1 N Num of Feed Digits 4 Connect Time Required 0 06 Start Super Seek Time 03 0 Delay before Dialout 0 0 Base DID Range of DID Numbers Adder low high 3434000 0000500 0000599 Figure 6 21 Telco Ports E amp M Window Supervision Types The Supervision Type for Incoming Calls tells the Model 827 whether it should expect feed digits from the PSTN PABX as soon as the connect time is qualified on the E Lead Immediate Start or should it wink the M Lead indicating to the PSTN PABX that it is ready to receive feed digits Wink Start The PSTN PABX will not send the feed digits until it sees the wink from the Model 827 in the case of Wink Start The amount of time the Model 827 winks the M Lead
238. om 6 54 Play Alert Tones for Incoming Phone Calls esses 6 54 Include these Sites in a Group 6 54 AUTODIAL TABLE PROGRAMMIING eene enne nennen 6 55 LEAST COST ROUTE PROGRAMMING 6 56 Routing Example tet intret ort a o cedi eva 6 56 Default Tr nk Group iia dne t terere oan ka aora ke E Re e onde eR ER 6 57 Advanced Multi site Least Cost Routing 6 58 Programming 6 58 Qutdial 6 58 Teast C ost Route 6 59 Plans PL UNE E 6 59 6 59 Program Name ooi recibo ende dax ee cate 6 62 se ter 6 62 JE DIST SNR RTT 6 62 Least Cost Route Table e sua uoc eee NE que uadit 6 63 ECR iio eM TD 6 63 LX RAIN BING sess sec teta des em dtes ee 6 64 Groupe uiuos b Gant debe ducati heat s 6 64 OutDral s ies tto abes este 6 64 Dial Plan 6 64 Number ei a pp I REO RES UN IAS pdt EEUU 6 65 6 65 EA aasa Iei 6 65 Route EE 6 65 Next Page
239. ompts Y Allow Landline to Mobile Calls Y Allow Mobile to Landline Calls Y Enable Disconnect Y Interdigit Timeout 5 0 HELP Line Connects To P Enter the type of equipment this telco Trunk Group 00 port connects to PSTN X PABX I Direct Intersite Link Figure 3 10 Telco Programming for Site 1 Unit 5 Any call that is routed to another site is placed into a queue while a link is established and the calling radio is notified that the call is queued Intermediate sites links in the communication chain must determine if the message will require an audio path If an audio path is needed the PCM bus at the site is connected from the incoming trunk group to the outgoing trunk group designated for the destination site Set up times will vary if traffic blocks resources at any site along the chain between the calling site and the destination site Care must be taken when designing the system to allow adequate links to prevent excessive queue times If a call remains queued beyond a programmable time out duration the call will be canceled 3 23 Section 3 Operation Given the initial conditions a site to site individual call using the information in the Network table shown above would progress as follows Initial Condition The caller and the called party have City 1 as their home site The caller is registered in City 1 and the called party in City 3 Cities 2 3 and 4 are all linked to each othe
240. on notches aligned with the notches in the sockets Carefully examine all pins of each IC Make sure pins are aligned in the sockets fully inserted and not bent out or under Turn on power to the Model 827 and make sure that the front panel gives a normal display If all LEDs are on the EPROMs were not installed correctly Replace the top cover of the unit Return the old EPROMs to Zetron in the protective shipping material in which the new were shipped If you are installing new version 2 00 or above and you have purchased the multi site option which you wish to enable for the first time an authorization process must be followed before your system will operate in the multi site mode After installing the EPROMs verify that switch 5 of dip switch 1 is in the down position Follow the instructions in the ENABLING YOUR SYSTEM FOR MULTISITE section on page 4 31 4 29 Section 4 Installation FLASH MEMORY SOFTWARE UPDATE Both the Model 827 and Model 844 contain optional flash memory program storage allowing software updates without opening the chassis to replace EPROMs Each Model 827 or Model 844 requires Zetron part number 950 0061 FLASH MEMORY OPTION to be installed The flash memory utility Zetron part number 950 0174 executes on the PC to upload the flash memory image Using flash memory utility The flash memory utility FLASH EXE installs itself into C flash Flash memory images received
241. on sketched in before programming the M827 sites Programming Order In the M827BASE Site submenu the database tables used for least cost routing are listed in the order in which they are used when an outgoing call is being processed However the order in which they must be programmed is in the opposite order Each of these database tables will be described more fully in the order in which they must be programmed Outdial Table First the OutDial Table will be explained followed by the Least Cost Route Table and lastly the Dial Plan Once these three tables are set up there are several last pieces of information that must be programmed to tie everything together and activate the least cost routing feature 6 58 Section 6 System Programming Least Cost Route Table The trunk groups specified in the trunk group column in the Least Cost Route must have members assigned to the group Telephone lines are assigned to trunk groups by selecting SITE TELCO PORTS in M827BASE The last field in the Telco Ports data window is Trunk Group Telco Ports should be assigned to trunk groups according to common usage or common destination For instance if some Telco Ports at a site are connected to a PBX and others are subscriber lines the ports connected to the PBX would be one trunk group and all of the subscriber lines would be assigned to another trunk group Dial Plans The last step in tying it all together is assigning units to Dial Plan
242. on still exists the alarms will immediately be triggered again The Rollover Statistics option will cause the current day s statistics to be copied to the previous day s and the current day s statistics will be set to zero To clear both today s and yesterday s statistics this option must be selected twice Reset Submenu The Reset submenu contains two options The Units soft option resets all the Model 827s at the selected site as if the power has been cycled This puts all the Model 827 in a fresh power up state but has no effect on the database programming audio levels or any settings that have been changed through M827BASE The Units hard option resets all the database programming back to the factory defaults This sets the modem initialization string and the database manager password in the Model 827 back to the default values This option DOES NOT clear the user recorded voice prompts or call detail memory The Terminate Call option provides a method of canceling a call on a specified traffic channel M827BASE will prompt Enter UNIT 1 24 with call you wish to terminate Enter the unit number of the traffic channel to terminate the call on Retrieve Submenu The Retrieve submenu contains one option 5 27 Section 5 Getting Started e The Site Status option retrieves status from multiple sites by connecting to one site in the system and requesting status from each site that the connected
243. on the Update menu see Figure 5 10 5 19 Section 5 Getting Started M827 Database Manager V2 30 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode UPDATE MENU Global Site COS Units Site config Network Repeater Telco Ports Dial Plan Least Cost Route Outdial Table Toll Class of Service HELP STATUS Select item with arrow keys and ENTER or capital letter ESC to quit Connecting to system Requesting unit type Update Site Config allows the Site Note Unit password is not secured Configuration data to be sent to all Connected to MPT system units at the selected site Ready to process commands Still connected to System Figure 5 10 Comm Menu Update Pop up Retrieve Billing The Retrieve Billing operation pulls all of the billing records from each of the Model 827s at the selected site and formats and stores the billing information on the PC The billing information is stored either in the M827BASE directory or the M827BILL directory For the format of the stored billing information refer to Appendix A Channel Monitor The Channel Monitor operation allows you to monitor all repeater channel traffic in real time It will display the current status of each Model 827 repeater controller at a given site The current control channel will display CONTROL in the STATUS column and any idle traffic channels will display IDLE If a channel is currently cross busied
244. one 8206363 Re Baud Rate 9600 Emerg calls demand resources Emerg call time limit 05 00 Alarms reported to Repeat alarm 002 Interval 020 HELP Country UK Enter phone number to use to access the site Edit Call Parms Y POMPES Yose Diversion Parms Y Create Date Alter Date 01 23 96 Schedule Y Networking Parms mode Port Figure 5 7 Site Configuration External Modem Window 3 Cable the DB9 connector on the Model 827 front panel to the DB25 serial port on the external modem This cable must be a null modem cable with a male DB9 connector at the Model 827 end and a male DB25 connector at the modem end The null modem cable connects each pin at one end to the same pin at the other end except for pins 2 and 3 which are crossed Be sure the cable uses the DTR wire which is pin 4 in the DB9 connector The DTR line will be used instead of the escape code to tell the modem when to hang up Make sure to set your Model 827 modem to use the DTR wire for reset On a Hayes 1200 bps modem you do this with switch SW1 in the UP position On most 2400 bps modems there is a Hayes command that the Model 827 sends to the modem to do this Make sure that your modem is set for Smart operation so it listens for the Hayes AT commands NOTE Power up the modem first then power up the Model 827 After power up and at periodic
245. onnector on most PCs The modem on your computer requires certain handshaking with M827BASE M827BASE has been set to talk to Hayes modems If the modem does not respond to the Hayes and ATDT commands you may have to change the initialization command string sent by M827BASE to your computer modem Use OTHER CHANGE PC MODEM PARMS from the Main Menu bar to change the initialization string Make sure that your modem is set for Smart operation so it listens for the Hayes AT commands Connect the modular RJ11 C jack labeled LINE or TELCO on the modem and the Model 827 to a telephone line Don t connect to the jacks labeled PHONE or LOCAL these are for telephone sets You will need two separate telephone lines Connecting a telephone cable from the PC s modem to the Model 827 will not work Modems are made to interface directly to the PSTN The audio levels on the Model 827 telephone interface must be loud enough to permit the modem to operate Please adjust the levels and balance the hybrid if necessary as described in Tests and Adjustments Telephone in Section 4 before attempting a modem connection Make sure everything is powered on and then select COMM TELCO MONITOR from the Main Menu bar in M827BASE Your PC will dial the telephone number and pause From the PC modem s speaker you should hear the Model 827 answer the call and play either dial tone or a voice prompt to begin overdialing digits At
246. op up another menu screen as shown in Figure 5 18 These three selections are Print Backup and Restore M827 Database Manager V2 30 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode nl Site COS Units Comm File otHer Print Backup Restore HELP Select item with arrow keys and ENTER or capital letter ESC to quit Print allows various database contents to be printed The contents may be printed directly to a printer or a file Select this item to choose from databases to print __ _ Figure 5 18 File Menu Options Print The Print menu allows you to selectively print a hard copy or save to an ASCII file any of the database files The print menu selections are organized just as they are found on the Main menu bar Once a print menu item has been activated an index window will appear to select a site if the item activated is a site specific database After the conditional index window you will be prompted to select how the database file should be sorted before printing Once the order has been selected you will be prompted for other information about printing printer Backup It is very important that you periodically save an extra copy of your database If your hard disk has trouble or if you accidentally delete one of the M827BASE files or if some disaster occurs you will be very happy to have a recent copy of the database We recommend that you do this daily Every time y
247. ou edit the database the files named dat change on the computer hard disk As a rule if you don t have a paper trail from which you could easily edit your last backup 5 29 Section 5 Getting Started then you are in a tenuous position until you make a copy of your database onto backup floppy diskettes From the Backup menu screen you can select Configuration data or call Detail to either save to floppy the database or billing data Before beginning a backup you need to prepare fresh diskettes with DOS compatible formatting information So make sure you have enough blank diskettes before you start the backup process format lt gt from the DOS prompt The Configuration data and Call detail information must be stored on separate diskettes It is also a good idea to put sticky labels on the diskettes that have the date and disk sequence number M827BASE BACKUP today s date disk n As you remove each backup diskette from the computer it is a good idea to write protect the diskette black label covering the notch on 5 1 4 inch media shutter open switch in the corner of 3 1 2 inch media M827BASE will give you precise instructions on when to insert your formatted floppy diskettes into the computer Keep more than one set of backups and rotate them through usage For example you might keep sets for the odd and even days of the month That way if one set becomes damaged you are still protected
248. ou wish mobiles who have been assigned this general class of service to be allowed to make intersite calls Edit Calls Four additional pop up windows are available to set Same Prefix Inter Prefix call privileges SDM2 Parameters and Divert Parameters 6 43 Section 6 System Programming Same Fleet The Same Fleet window allows each type of same fleet call to be individually enabled or disabled See Figure 6 24 for an example of the available fields COS GENERAL INDEX COS Class Name 01 H nn STANDARD CLASS ELP ter Y if same fleet simple group calls are allowed 6 44 G COS Number COS Name All All SAME_FLEET Group Calls A Simple Y Priority N Emergency N Individual Cal Non Prescribed Data Call Allowed Simple Y Priority N Emergency N ENERAL COS ow Incoming ow to Phone ls Allowed SUPERVISOR mode 01 STANDARD CLASS from Phone N lowed Simple Y Priority N Emergency N Status Calls Al Short Data Call Individuals Self Divert N Include Calls Enn Figure 6 24 General COS Same Fleet Window lowed Y s Allowed to N Groups N Third Party Divert N Y Section 6 System Programming Inter Fleet Calls The Inter Fleet window allows each type of inter fleet call to be individually enabled or disabled See Figure 6 25 for an exa
249. ould be found and no further searching would ensue Roaming COS The Roam COS serves three purposes it specifies which Model 827 sites in the system a unit can Roam to and also specifies which Dial Plan and Toll Class of Service the unit will use at each of these Model 827 sites The Roam COS is the last link or step in enabling the Least Cost Routing feature of the Model 827 for a particular unit Figure 6 39 shows the Roam COS data window Note that the entries for the SITE the DIAL PLAN and the TOLL COS fields must be selected from Sites Dial Plans and Toll COSs that have already been defined Note also that DIAL PLAN 1 at SITE 001 is different from DIAL PLAN 1 at SITE 002 The Dial Plans are defined for each specific site because numbers that constitute local numbers at one site are most likely different from local numbers at another site Likewise TOLL COS 1 at SITE 001 is different from TOLL COS 1 at SITE 002 Once a Roam COS has been defined it can now be assigned to individual units under the UNITS UNITS selection in M827BASE refer to Figure 6 30 and to the on screen HELP for the Roaming field 6 66 Section 6 System Programming COS ROAM SUPERVISOR mode INDEX ROAMING COS COS Roaming Class Name 01 LOCAL amp NEAR SITES ROAM COS NUM 01 ROAM COS NAME LOCAL amp NEAR SITES SITE DIAL TOLL SITE DIAL TOLL PLAN COS PLAN COS 1 001 1 1 2 002 1 1 3
250. p containing the rest of the parameters that define the System Identity Code For detailed information on the System Identity Code refer to paragraph 9 3 4 2 2 in MPT 1343 System Identity The System Identity field is a view only field that displays the current System Identity Code in 4 hexadecimal digits All of the fields on this pop up window are OR ED together according to the values entered in each field and the definitions in MPT 1343 This view only field is updated each time a new value is entered in one of the fields on this window 6 12 Section 6 System Programming Network Operator Identity The Network operator identity field is assigned by the Radio communications Agency for both National Network and Regional Systems This number is encoded in the System Identity Code Zone Area Free SIL Field Lengths The Zone field length or the field length for Area Free or SIL must be filled in to get a non Zero bit pattern in the Network Dependent Data portion of the System Identity Code The Zone field length specifies the number of bits to use in the Network Dependent Data sub field Zone Data The Zone data field is the actual number or data to be transmitted in the Network Dependent Data sub field of the System Identity Code Either the Zone Area Free or SIL data fields must be filled in or any combination of these fields can be filled in The Network Dependent Data is a combination of all four of these data fields
251. p or down arrow keys to highlight a different item in the submenu window If the up arrow key is pressed too many times the submenu window will disappear press the down arrow key for the submenu window to re appear To move to another submenu on the Main Menu bar use the left or right arrow keys Once the desired operation is highlighted the Enter key will activate the operation 5 16 Section 5 Getting Started M827 Database Manager V2 30 1996 2000 Zetron SUPERVISOR mode _ Site COS Units Comm File otHer Site config MPT1327 Config Network Repeater Telco Ports Dial Plan Least Cost Route Outdial Table Toll Class of Service HELP Select item with arrow keys and ENTER or capital letter ESC to quit Edit Site Config allows the Site Configuration data to be changed Additions deletions and modifications can be don Then use Comm Update Figure 5 8 Site Menu Options Notice that the information in the Help window is updated to reflect the menu item currently selected Edit Menu Selections There are three menus that allow you to edit different logical groups of data in the Model 827 database The first of these can be found in the Site submenu All of the individual edit operations in the Site submenu window pertain to programming that is specific to one particular physical site The second submenu COS contains Class of Service information that can be assigned to specific
252. p field assigns this line to a particular trunk group Grouping telephone lines either by circuit type or destination into a Trunk Group is necessary for Least Cost Routing All telco ports are always members of Trunk Group 0 by default This group of all available telco ports can be further sub divided into Trunk Groups for Least Cost Routing by assigning a Trunk Group number in this field The Trunk Group number assigned here would be the Trunk Group number used in the Least Cost Routing table see Least Cost Route Table on page 6 63 GENERAL CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING The General Class of Service COS information can be accessed by selecting COS GENERAL Figure 6 23 shows the General Class of Service data window with the COS Number field highlighted In each Model 827 system there should be at least one General Class of Service defined and each radio unit enabled in the system should have a General Class of Service assigned to it If 6 41 Section 6 System Programming no General Class of Service has been assigned to a unit a default set of privileges are used If a unit has not been assigned a General Class of Service they are given a default set of privileges which include the capability to make same fleet speech group and status calls with a fixed call limit of 60 seconds COS GENERAL SUPERVISOR mode INDEX GENERAL COS COS Class Name COS Number 01 01 STANDARD CLASS COS Name STAN
253. position A FFSK Flat Data Refer to Figure 4 9 and Table 4 5 4 16 Section 4 Installation 6 DISCRIMINATOR INPUT Connect pins 1 Discriminator High and 2 Discriminator Low to the discriminator output of the receiver If the radio receiver has a single line discriminator output connect Model 827 pin 2 Discriminator Low to ground The receiver and Model 827 settings must be matched for proper operation of the system Configure the Model 827 input to match the receiver output used JP7 and JP10 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller each have two settings and should be set to match position A receiver output is pre emphasized position B receiver output is de emphasized i e flat output Make the appropriate selection for the receiver used Refer to Figure 4 9 and Table 4 5 7 COR INPUT The MODEL 827 requires a signal from the receiver to indicate when a radio unit is transmitting This signal is either derived from the receiver squelch circuit External COR or is produced internally by the noise squelch circuit in the Model 827 Internal COR This signal is sometimes called Carrier Operated Relay COR or similar names such as RUS CAS or COS External COR input from the receiver The Model 827 needs a voltage applied to Pin 6 that changes at least one volt between carrier unsquelched and no carrier squelched conditions When the External COR wire is connected set jumper JP6 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Co
254. pts Y Networking Parms Y allocation as a traffic or control Diversion Parms Y channel 0 99 secs default 2 secs Create Date 01 10 96 Alter Date 05 07 96 Figure 6 1 Required Site Configuration Fields Site Number The Site Number field must be filled in with a unique number identifying this particular site within your system This number is used by M827BASE to keep track of all site specific programming i e all other Site Submenu items CAUTION Site Numbers should not be changed on existing sites that are part of a multi site network Changing the site numbers can result in erratic behavior due to the fact that registration information may no longer be correct If Site Numbers must be changed a hard reset should be performed on each site in the network before new site configuration with new site numbers are loaded into the system Programming Access The Programming Access field determines how the PC will establish a communication link with the Model 827 site for programming etc The Comm Port field tells the PC which serial port to use Refer to Communication Link to Model 827 in Section 5 for more information Set M827 Time from PC Time The Set M827 time from PC time tells M827BASE where to get the time date to send to the Model 827s when the COMM OTHER SET TIME menu item is activated If this field is 6 3 Section 6 System Programming set to Y a window will pop up to enter whether
255. puter is a male DB9 connector use a cable that matches the pin out shown above in Figure 5 1 for DB9 on the PC side Connect the cable to the computer s serial port and the other end to the DB9 connector on the Model 827 s front panel If computer s COM port has a DB25 connector the cable must follow the pin out 5 3 Section 5 Getting Started 3 5 4 for DB25 connector shown in Figure 5 1 This cable would be a modem cable with a male DB9 connector at the Model 827 end Select a communication speed for the Model 827 with the DIP switches 9600 is fast Note that a new baud rate setting will not take effect until power has been cycled on the Model 827 There are three switches that control the baud rate switches 6 7 and 8 of SW1 the one on the left as you face the Model 827 front panel See Table 5 1 below for details Table 5 1 Communications Baud Rate Settings SW1 Front Panel Baud Rate 1200 bps 9600 bps Down Down From M827BASE select SITE SITE CONFIG Now select the site you want to communicate with and go to the Data window for that site Move the cursor to the Programming Access field and set it to then select the baud rate to match the baud rate of the Model 827 See Figure 5 2 below for details Then move to the Comm Port field and enter the number of the COM port on the computer you are using SITE SITE CONFIG INDEX Site Site Name Country 001 LOCAL S
256. qualified go ahead and balance the hybrid A sample screen is shown in Figure 6 22 6 39 Section 6 System Programming SITE TELCO PORTS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 TD Unit Number 01 01 E Y Line Type E Disable Port Y Auto Balance Hybrids Y Enable AUTO BALANCE Time to Balance 02 00 Allow Number to Dial 8200200 Allow Interdigit Timeout 5 0 Line Connects To O0 HELP Trunk Group 00 Enter the time to balance the hybrid using a 24 hour clock HH MM Figure 6 22 Telco Ports Auto Balance Window Enable Voice Prompts If the Enable Voice Prompts field 15 set to N voice prompts will not be played on this telephone line If this field is set to Y voice prompts will be played if a particular prompt is active and has been recorded Please see TONE AND VOICE PROMPT PROGRAMMING on page 6 68 for information on voice prompts Allow Calls Allow Landline to Mobile Calls and Allow Mobile to Landline Calls lets incoming and outgoing calls to be selectively enabled or disabled for this telco port Incoming Call Mode If Y is entered in response to Allow Landline to Mobile Calls a pop up window will appear to enter the Incoming Call Mode The available incoming call modes are 0 Default expect overdial or feed digits 1 If no digits are entered call the specified individual or group 2 Automatically call the specified indivi
257. r and can be any Model 827 unit number in the range 1 to 32 Line Type The Line Type field specifies the type of telephone interconnect circuit installed in the Model 827 The type must be set corresponding to the telco DIP switch settings which are located in DIP switch positions 1 4 of SW1 SWI is the switch on the left as you face the front panel of the Model 827 The Line Type determines whether the Model 827 should expect feed digits from the PSTN or overdial digits Refer to Section 4 for details End to End The window displayed in Figure 6 20 shows parameters that must be programmed for each telco port that are specific to End to End type telephone circuits The parameters that apply mainly to End to End type lines will be explained in more detail 6 33 Section 6 System Programming SITE TELCO PORTS SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 c Unit Number 01 01 E Y Line Type E Disable Port Y END END Auto Balan Dial Out Mode D Enable Voi Disconnect on Battery Y Battery Qual Time 0 08 Allow Land Delay Before Prompt 1 0 Allow Mobi Connect Time Required 0 30 Rings Until Answer 1 Interdigit Min Onhook Time 02 Line Conne Dialtone Required Y HELP Trunk Grou Dialtone Seek Time 04 0 Select the Dial Out Mode Delay Before Dialout 0 0 Enter DTMF Dial Click Mode N PULSE Figure 6 20 Telco Ports End End Window Disconnect on Batte
258. r speech and interconnect calls In circumstances in which a system has reached a programmed level of loading the call limits will be reduced in an attempt to clear the queues and relieve the backlog of calls See Call on page 3 7 At the termination of a call the Model 827 will send out a programmed number of CLEAR messages on the traffic channel If after sending the CLEAR messages the channel is still busy COR detected the Model 827 will continue to monitor the channel for the programmed clear down time If the channel becomes free during this time the CLEAR sequence will be transmitted again and the channel will become available as long as it does not become busy again during the transmission of the CLEARS If the channel is still busy after the expiration of the clear down time that channel will be indicated as being in a jammed state Include Calls Once a call has been established on the traffic channel an include call can be requested for either an individual or group Include calls are supported for both single and multi site requests Include call requests for PSTN or PABX are not supported and will be rejected by system An include call will remain active until less than two radios remain in call the last remaining radio which could disconnect the call leaves the call or call activity duration timers expire 3 9 Section 3 Operation Nonstandard Data Calls The modulation format for nonstandard data can be
259. r through City 1 Secondary registration is enabled The link between Cityl and City 3 is currently busy with an inter site call 1 The caller travels from City 1 to City 2 and registers City 2 notifies City 1 which is the caller s home site that the caller is now at City 2 City 1 updates the caller s registration making City 2 the primary site and City 1 the secondary site City 1 then broadcasts to all sites in its network table the new primary and secondary registration information for the caller 2 The caller selects or enters the number of the called unit and places a call 3 City 2 then simultaneously sends a request to the called unit s home site City 1 for the radio s current location as well as sending the location confirmation request to City 3 where it believes the called unit is currently located In the mean time the caller is notified that they are queued 4 City returns both the primary and secondary locations of the called radio to City 2 City 2 verifies that the called unit s registration information is the same as what it previously believed so it makes no adjustments to it s plan of action 5 City 2 attempts to establish a link to City 3 which is the site the called radio is currently registered at A link is available from City 2 to City 1 but the link from City 1 to City 3 is busy so the request is queued If all resources become available before the intersite queue timeout has expired the links will be
260. r to Least Cost Routing in Section 5 for more information Advanced Dial Plan The Advanced Dial Plan when enabled in the Site Configuration see Section 5 causes a predefined leading digit to be added to the numbers dialed for outgoing calls to the PSTN or PABX These digits are appended before either the toll restriction or the outdial programs are applied Table 3 2 below defines the digits that will be appended Table 3 2 Advanced Dial Plan Description MPT1343 Call Type Appended Section a 4 Digit dialed strings PABX 8 2 5 2 ID 1000 8999 FLAG 1 2 5 Digit dialed strings PABX 2 5 ID 1000 Dependent 8999 on FLAG 1 2 flag 1 2 0 3 value 5 7 Digit dialed strings PABX 2 5 ID PABXI Leading digit 0 Leading digit 7 Leading digit 8 Leading digit 0 7 or 8 8 or 9 Digit dialed strings PABX 2 5 ID PABXI Leading digit 7 or 8 8 32 Digit dialed strings PSTN 2 6 ID PSTNGI Abbreviated dialing 01 15 2 6 ID 2 PSTNIJ NO append digit Numbers are preprogrammed in autodial table with suitable lead digit Leading digit 7 Leading digit 8 Radio Unit to PABX Calls Outgoing calls to a PABX are initiated by the mobile unit sending a request for a call with ident of PABXI call to a long PABX extension or 0 8191 with EXT 1 short addressing call to a PABX extension Calls to a PABX which can be accommodated with a number between 1000 8999 use short addressin
261. rall transmission characteristics shall introduce no material effect upon electrical conditions presented to one another by the Model 827 telephone interface option and the speech band circuit 2 Cables and wiring shall comply with a code of practice for the installation of equipment covered by BS 6328 or such other requirements as may be applicable Receive to Transmit Loss RTL Receive to Transmit Loss RTL is the loss measured from the telephone speech band circuit receive terminals to the telephone speech band circuit transmit terminals of an apparatus When two apparatus are connected at opposite ends of a particular point to point circuit the sum of the RTL numbers of the two apparatus shall be equal to or greater than 28 Since the Model 827 with a telephone interface option installed functions alone with speech signals from radio equipment being transmitted to the telephone circuit and speech signals from the telephone circuit being transmitted to the radio equipment the RTL number of the Model 827 telephone interface option is set to 14 14 28 WARNING Apparatus having an RTL number greater than zero must be used to terminate the distant end of this circuit Failure to do so is a breach of the conditions of approval of this apparatus PBX Applications When the Model 827 telephone interface option will be connected to a PBX the following statements apply The apparatus Model 827 telephone interface option is appro
262. rate switches on the Model 827 front panel for the modem baud rate connected to the Model 827 s RS 232 port The baud rate is set by switch positions 6 7 and 8 of SWI which located on the left as you face the Model 827 front panel See Table 5 4 for details 5 10 Section 5 Getting Started Table 5 4 External Modem Baud Rate Settings Front Panel SW1 Settings Baud Rate 6 7 8 NOTE Cycle the Model 827 power off and then on to make the new switch settings take effect Each time the Model 827 is reset it issues commands to program the modem It is best to power up the modem first and then power up the Model 827 with the proper baud rate set 2 In M827BASE select SITE SITE CONFIG and move to the Programming Access field on the Site Configuration data window of the site to remotely communicate with Enter X in this field and then enter the telephone number for the telephone line connected to the Model 827 s external modem See Figure 5 7 below for details The baud rate you select must be the same as the baud rate selected for the Model 827 s external modem according to the front panel dip switches Also fill in the correct PC COM port number that your PC modem is connected to Section 5 Getting Started SITE SITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR INDEX SITE CONFIG Site Site Name Country Site Number 001 001 LOCAL SITE UK Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access X Comm Se MODEM Mo External Modem Ph
263. rconnect call parameters which apply to all the telco ports at a specific Model 827 site These parameters are included in the site configuration rather than duplicating the information for each telco port at the site A sample of the site wide Call Parameters can be seen in Figure 6 2 SITE SITE CONFIG INDEX Site Site Name _ Country 001 LOCAL SITE UK Enter E amp M number for accessing overdial prompt SUPERVISOR mode SITE_CONFIG Site Number 001 Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access O Comm Port 1 Set M827 time from PC time Y Modem access number 0008888 CALLPARM E amp M Number to access overdial promt Disconnect on Call Progress tone Y Min Call Length to store in CDR PSTN 020 Speech 020 Store Call Detail Records for Status Calls Y Registrations Y SDM2s Y Call Failures Y Lead digit to designate Direct Dial Access 4 Number digits to expect after lead 4 Use Advanced Dial Plan N Figure 6 2 Site Configuration Call Parameters 6 5 Section 6 System Programming E amp M Number to Access Overdial Prompt The E amp M Number to access overdial prompt would be used when the Model 827 is receiving feed digits from the PSTN PABX and the regular methods of overdialing are still desired Once the Model 827 receives the feed digits for this number to access overdial prompt the caller will hear the welcome prompt and may overdial using any of the methods describ
264. rk Operator Identity eset ro teer eoe 6 13 Zone Area Free SIL Field Lengths 6 13 PAC ND Ale PM LL EN 6 13 6 13 MPT1327 Configuration Queuing 6 13 Dynamic Call Limit Thresholds eene 6 14 Traffic Telco Queue 6 14 Call Limit ReductiOli ceti eeu 6 14 MPT 1327 Paramneter to eee pieni Rae EU Sd is RE 6 15 TA ATIC OUI 6 15 SIMIC OU eoa oem t 6 15 TESTE amd 6 15 TFW 6 16 Number of Retries Availability 6 16 Number of Retries SDM2 Short Data 6 16 Trarho Channel Sele HORE riva bleed e ved ua ROS 6 16 Group Call tons 6 16 Group Answer TimeoUt e date aee 6 16 Group GTC Rate 6 16 Clear DOWN ME 6 16 Max Units Wait for Response 6 17 Can Control Channel Become Traffic sese 6 17 Control Channel Operation Mode eere 6 17 Cyclic Control Channel Dwell 6 17 Transmit Registration
265. rt The serial port field on each line of the networking table specifies the unit number of the serial link connected to the site specified in the Connected Site field If no serial link is being used this field must be left blank or a value of zero entered 6 25 Section 6 System Programming Baud Rate The baud rate field on each line of the networking table sets the baud rate of the optional serial link This field is not used if the Serial field is blank or zero Trunk Group The Trunk Group field on each line of the networking table specifies the trunk group of the links to the site entered in the Site field Telco Intersite links are assigned to Trunk Groups in the Telco database See Trunk Group on page 6 41 for further details Queue Size The Queue Size field on each line of the networking table sets the number of queue entries to allow to the site specified in the Connected Site field REPEATER PROGRAMMING The Repeater information can be accessed by selecting SITE REPEATER in M827BASE Once a site has been selected you can enable the repeater for each Model 827 at your site Figure 6 15 shows the Repeater information that must be programmed for your site For information on the rest of the fields refer to the on screen HELP for each field SITE REPEATER SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE 001 RP Chan Unit Number 01 01 1000 RF Logical Channel Number 1000 U
266. rtual link to another site GETTING STARTED This subsection is an introduction to the operation of the M827BASE software It describes the general operation language and screens you will need to be familiar with before attempting the specific operations described in later subsections The following topics will be covered in this subsection e Running the Software Keyboard Commands e Main Menu Screen e Edit Submenus Site COS Units Comm Submenu e File Submenu e Other Submenu Running the Software After M827BASE has been installed on your computer use the following procedure to run the software 1 At the DOS prompt go to the M827BASE directory cd m827base lt ENTER gt 2 Start the program m827base lt ENTER gt Keyboard Commands The M827BASE program responds to commands from the keyboard Entry and exit from all screens windows and fields must be done with keys or a combination of keys Table 5 5 shows the responses to expect when the listed keys are pressed while the cursor is in an index window or a data window The index window is labeled INDEX on the screen and the DATA windows appear on the right hand side of the monitor and are labeled with the relating the types of data which can be edited in the window 5 14 Section 5 Getting Started The Shift Ctrl and Alt keys are used in combination with other keys to perform special functions in M827BASE To activate a combination first press
267. ry The Disconnect on Battery field tells the Model 827 whether or not it should look for loss of battery and disconnect the interconnect call This will cause the call to disconnect at any point during the call if the Model 827 detects a loss of loop current for the amount of time entered in the Battery Qual Time field Delay Before Prompt The Delay Before Prompt is used to create a delay between when the Model 827 answers an incoming telephone call and when the Welcome prompt is played to the user This delay is often necessary because of the amount of time it takes for the PSTN to connect the audio after the Model 827 goes off hook answering the call If the PSTN does not connect the audio immediately and the Model 827 plays the Welcome prompt immediately the user will not hear the prompt and won t know when to overdial Note The Model 827 is not ready to receive overdial digits until the Welcome prompt has started playing just as the PSTN is not ready until dial tone is heard 6 34 Section 6 System Programming Connect Time Required The Connect Time Required field is the amount of time ringing must be present for the Model 827 to detect an incoming telephone call This means that any spurious ringing present for less than the connect time will be ignored by the Model 827 Rings Until Answer Once an incoming call has been detected the Model 827 will not answer the call until ringing voltage is no longer
268. s This is done in the Roam COS The Model 827 sites that a unit can roam to are assigned in the Roam Class of Service along with a Toll Restrict COS and a Dial Plan to use at each one of the sites When creating a Roam Class of Service each site included in the Roam COS must already be defined in M827BASE Likewise the Dial Plans and Toll Restrict COSs that can be selected for each site must already have been defined under SITE DIAL PLAN and SITE TOLL CLASS OF SERVICE respectively in M827BASE Once the Roam COS has been programmed the Roam COS can now be assigned to individual units under UNITS UNITS in M827BASE Outdial Table For each Model 827 site up to 32 different OutDial Programs can be defined These programs define exactly how the digits dialed by the radio user will be dialed out to the PSTN and or PBX These OutDial Programs allow the Model 827 to take advantage of special line types and or access to other long distance carriers Figure 6 35 shows the SITE OUTDIAL TABLE selection from M827BASE A complete description of each of the commands will follow 6 59 Section 6 System Programming SITE INDEX NO Program Name 01 LOCAL CALLS OUTDIAL TABLE HELP Select item with arrow keys and press ENTER RETURN Esc key exits SUPERVISOR mode SITE 001 OUTDIAL PROGRAM Program Number 01 Program Name LOCAL CALLS Command ra
269. s 6 30 RE POI Oss edd sente adis tem endet aU M MEME 6 30 Auto CCA eM EH OCT Or 6 30 Check on PTT Only 6 30 Disable oodd esiste viti e tesi suas teases o tee 6 30 Valid dise oso e o A E SUIS tdt Hoe E UNS 6 30 Status to Transmit to Radio 6 31 Internal e E 6 31 Call Bos pero e 6 32 Subscriber and Repeater Bus Fault 6 32 TELCO PORTS PROGRAMNMLNCT itereisde ite ipie He 6 32 Ent NUIDSE 6 33 Line hr EE 6 33 eerte ie peteret teu eerte eerta 6 33 Disconnect on Ballery iik uae up Eee IRI 6 34 Delay Before eet ida due 6 34 Connect Time Required nei US Hn tte impe Ne m B RENS 6 35 Rings Until ANSWER ies has iso ge e 6 35 Minimum Onhook 6 35 Dialtone Required and Seek 6 35 Delay Before Dialout se cotta 6 35 Dial qe piae EU Sd ia RE 6 36 DONI Dep e Mei 6 36 Supervision teca taa e 6 37 Incoming Signaling a uon ono pde teer E 6 38 E amp M Ype l os oie pm aec aS 6 38 Number of Feed Ree orate ree ee 6 38 Connect Time Required 2555
270. s are available the telco line will be activated if the expected supervision is detected the number dialing will start and the go to channel message will be issued If desired telephone ports can be allocated using Least Cost Routing Three tables Dial Plan Least Cost Route and OutDial are available to set up least cost routing These tables allow routing of outgoing calls to a particular group of telephone ports trunk group depending on the number dialed They also define the actual number that will be dialed out once an available line from the correct trunk group has been allocated The Dial Plans set up the correspondence between the number dialed and the Least Cost Routes for each user Dial Plans are assigned to a user through their Roaming Class of Service The Least Cost Route tables define which trunk groups are searched in which order for an available line lines are assigned to a trunk group as part of the telco programming As the final part of the process the OutDial tables define how dialing is to take place on each trunk group The OutDial programs are setup by generating a list of commands with parameters that indicate exactly how a number is to be dialed out the telephone line If these tables are not programmed or the next step in the least cost routing algorithm is 3 14 Section 3 Operation indeterminate the first available line in trunk group 0 will be used Trunk group 0 consists of all active telephone lines Refe
271. s are busy If Queuing is enabled this will not apply until the Traffic Queue is full If this field is set to N a control channel will never be used for traffic Control Channel Operation Mode The Control Channel Operation Mode determines whether the control channel is Fixed or Cyclic Fixed means the control channel stays on the same channel and only moves to another channel when the current control channel is disabled or looses power Cyclic Control Channel Dwell Time Cyclic means that the control channel will stay on a repeater that is configured to operate as a control channel for a programmable amount of time and then the control channel passes to the next repeater configured for control channel operation The Cyclic ctrl channel dwell time field will pop up on a window when C is entered in the Control Channel Operation Mode field Transmit Registration Parameters The Transmit Reg Parameters and Reg Parameters fields select if the control channel should transmit registration parameters periodically and if so what parameters to transmit Error Correction Control Channel Traffic Channel The Error Correction Cntrl channel and Traffic Channel fields select the amount of error correction to be performed on incoming FFSK packets A value of 0 no error correction 1 bit error correction and 2 bit pair correction Traffic Parameters This window sets parameters that help to manage calls on a traffic channel Please
272. s are detected in the MODEL 827 the unit will reset the user database to the default settings and clear the voice prompt memory If the audio does not sound correct perform an audio sweep test by generating an audio signal on the RF input of the repeater of known deviation and monitor the repeater output deviation The deviation should be flat from 300 to 2500 Hz When using the internal noise detector for COR if the COR polarity switch seems backward the audio input from the receiver may not have enough high frequency content greater than 6 kHz for the noise detector to operate It is usually caused by low pass filtering of the discriminator signal An alternate connection point must be found in the receiver which provides unfiltered audio or a receiver generated COR signal must be connected The COR LED must follow carrier activity on the channel It must be lit with carrier present and extinguished when carrier is absent If it is always off the Model 827 will not function correctly The TELCO LED is lit whenever the MODEL 827 is offhook on the telephone interface The REPEATER LED will be lit if the repeater has been allocated active in the Trunking system and repeat audio is enabled The PTT LED will be lit if the repeater is transmitting The ALARM LED will be lit if the repeater malfunctions Specifically if the repeater is commanded to shutdown and COR is subsequently detected an error will be signaled by ill
273. s in a group call 6 54 join existing call 6 54 member of fleet 6 53 number 6 53 play alert tones for incoming phone calls 6 54 programming 6 52 GTC number sent 6 19 H home site 6 48 hybrids auto balance 6 39 I in case of difficulty 4 28 Index include call 3 9 include these sites in a group call 6 54 incoming call mode 6 40 indicators led 3 2 installation requirements 4 1 installation of the Canadian telephone interface C 3 installation procedure 4 15 installing new eproms 4 30 inter fleet calls 6 45 interburst period 6 28 interconnect option 3 13 internal alarms 6 31 call log overflow 6 32 subscriber repeater bus fault 6 32 internal modem baud rate 5 6 operational mode 5 9 internal noise detector for COR 4 29 intersite links line connects to 6 41 J join existing call 6 54 K keyup delay 6 28 L LAB 6 13 last group number 6 49 last individual number 6 49 lead digit to designate direct dial access 6 6 least cost route 6 58 6 59 6 65 multi site 6 58 name 6 64 number 6 63 outdial program 6 64 programming 6 63 trunk group 6 64 least cost routing 3 14 example 6 56 programming 6 56 trunk group 6 41 length area field 6 13 SIL field 6 13 zone field 6 13 line connects to 6 41 line types 3 13 M M827BASE 5 1 comm menu channel monitor 5 20 other 5 25 clear submenu 5 27 reset submenu 5 27 retrieve submenu 5 27 set submenu 5 26 repeater levels
274. se Channel As B Cross Busy Play Station Id N Keyup Delay 0020 RX Jammed Timer 120 Receive Delay 00 Transmit Delay 00 Enable Delay 00 HELP Edit Sense Alarms Y Edit Internal Alarms Y Edit press ENTER RETURN Guide Window Fl Done Esc Figure 6 15 Required Repeater Configuration Fields 6 26 Section 6 System Programming Unit Number The Unit Number field is the Model 827 unit number determined by the front panel DIP switch settings The DIP switches are switches 1 5 on SW2 the switch on the right as you face the Model 827 front panel RF Logical Channel Number The RF Logical Channel Number field is the RF Channel Number of the Base Station connected to this Model 827 This Channel Number is the same channel number programmed into the mobiles based on the Base Frequency and the Channel Spacing used in your system Use Channel As The Use Channel As field specifies whether this repeater should be used as a Traffic channel only Control channel only Both traffic and control channel or Disable the channel Cross Busy The Cross Busy field should be set to if this repeater is operating in the cross busy mode If Y is entered and return is hit a pop up window will appear with additional fields related to cross busy operation Figure 6 16 shows a sample of the cross busy programming window SITE REPEATER SUP
275. sing flash memory ius favs inen 4 30 Configuring flash memory 4 30 ENABLING YOUR SYSTEM FOR MULTISITE OPERATION 4 31 4 INSTALLATION INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL WARNINGS Review the Installation and Operational Warnings found in the front of this manual just before Section 1 GENERAL The Model 827 Trunking Controller has two different telephone interface options The text in this section refers to the UK Telephone Interface Option 950 9640 If you have a Canadian Telephone Interface Option 950 0002 the text will direct you to Appendix C for the correct pin numbers or installation and test instructions Each step in this section must still be completed but certain details must be obtained from Appendix C Connections to the transmitter and receiver are grouped on a detachable 12 pin connector on the rear of the Model 827 for ease of installation Connection to external alarms and sensors are grouped on a detachable 10 pin connector on the rear of the Model 827 for ease of installation Connection to the PSTN is via an RJ45 8 pin modular plug connected to J1 of 702 9758 Telephone Interface board Interconnect of multiple Model 827s is accomplished via the PCM cable and J1 of 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller Requirements The following equipment and software is needed to install the Model 827
276. sis and de emphasis on speech and flat data Preferred Selections INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 Refer to Figure 4 5 and Table 4 1 1 Locate the 12 pin connector from the accessory bag included with the Model 827 see Figure 4 2 2 GROUND CONNECTION Connect a chassis ground wire from pins 3 7 12 to the chassis ground of the transceiver 4 15 Section 4 Installation 3 TRANSMITTER PTT Single input For most transmitters a contact closure to ground will cause the transmitter to key up For this configuration connect a wire from pin 8 PTT1 to the PTT input of the transmitter Connect pin 9 PTT2 to transmitter ground Set jumper JP3 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller to position A Normally Open or position B Normally Closed in accordance to the requirements of your transmitter Isolated inputs For transmitters with two wire PTT connect one of the two transmitter PTT inputs to pin 8 PTT1 and the other input to pin 9 PTT2 Set jumper JP3 on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller to position A Normally Open or position B Normally Closed in accordance to the requirements of your transmitter The Transmit Out High signal on pin 4 can be routed internally in one of two ways directly to P1 output connected continuously by placing a jumper on JP2 board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller e through the PTT relay by removing the jumper o
277. sources Priorities assigned to a call are determined from the programmed priority for the unit or group initiating the call and whether the call is a normal or priority call Each unit or group is assigned a priority level of 1 to 4 with 4 being the highest Initiation of a priority call by any user increases their assigned priority for the duration of that call by 1 For example if a unit has been assigned a priority of 2 if that unit places a priority call they will be considered to have a priority of 3 for the duration of the call All queued speech non emergency calls between the same idents calling and called will be amalgamated If the called party is busy in another call the system holds the request until the called party becomes available and informs the calling mobile with an ACKQ Q 1 of this event 3 7 Section 3 Operation If the called party and calling party are available the system will queue the request until all the required resources are available and inform the calling mobile with an ACKQ Q 0 If for any reason the call does not get to a traffic channel before the call queuing timer TW expires the system will restart the calling radio s wait timer by sending out an AHY P 1 before TW expires The system will continue to restart the radio s TW until the maximum time a call is allowed to remain in the queue is reached at which time the call will be removed from the queue the TW will be allowed to expire and th
278. st COSE ay pac Secchi cect epe aem diee Ea ad sepa tlie 3 14 Advanced Dial Plains a edge iare us DE Me EM e 3 15 Radio Untto PABX Calls E e Sa 3 15 PSTN PABX to Radio Calls 3 16 PSTN PABX Overdial Speech 3 17 PSTN PABX Direct Dial 3 17 M lti Site Operation eie 3 18 Roaming and Re tsttatlOfi 3 19 cul T 3 19 Individual Calls nde ede eti rt ete oot 3 20 iecit 3 24 Emergency Calls Demanding Resources in a Multi Site Network 3 25 Multi Site Radio to PSTN PABX 3 25 Multi Site Diversions Divert on Busy and No Answer 3 25 lol 3 26 Operating With Lost LINKS 3 26 Voice and Tone Prombpts 3 26 CALLE IDE TAM RECORDS oreste tique eive pad atn 3 27 ALARM DETECTION AND REPORTING STATISTICS oon e dt 3 OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The Model 827 MPT1327 Trunking Controller uses the over the air signaling format specified by MPT1327 and includes the mandatory aspects of the protocol identified in 1343 and MPT1347 This protocol uses signaling at 1200 bits s with Fast Frequency Shift Keying FFSK subcarrier modulation The sig
279. stination site the longer the call setup time will be RING STAR MESH Figure 3 3 Model 827 Multi Site Topologies 3 18 Section 3 Operation Roaming and Registration Roaming is the simple act of moving from one site to another To support roaming in the Model 827 each unit is assigned a home site through its fleet programming see Fleets on page 5 56 of the manual The database information which identifies each user and a user s capabilities is shared among all sites All sites in the network keep track of each unit s current location but the unit s home site is considered the final authority when discrepancies arise A MPT1327 compliant radio is constantly measuring the receive quality of the control channel by using parameters that have been programmed into the radio These parameters define the hunt or scanning process for obtaining the control channel as well as the mechanism to define whether a control channel is good enough to use or bad enough to relinquish When a radio roams from one area to another its count of corrupted control channel code words will pass a programmed number NX2 forcing the radio to scan for the next acceptable control signal When a new control channel is obtained from a new area the radio will autoregister The home site can be programmed to remember up to 2 user locations primary and secondary When a radio registers at a new site that site sends the registration information to the radi
280. t to specify that the user is overdialing a Direct Dial Access number This is the direct dial access described in PSTN PABX Overdial Speech Calls in Section 3 Once an overdial user dials this lead digit the Model 827 will know which mode of overdialing is being used Number of Digits to Expect After Lead The Number digits to expect after lead field is the number of overdial digits the Model 827 should expect to be dialed by a user once the lead digit has been received Once the Model 827 receives the correct number of digits after the lead digit the Model 827 will search the Direct Dial Numbers programmed in the database for Units Groups Fleets Modem access number and Voice Prompt Programming Access to determine the final destination of the call 6 6 SIT Si 00 Section 6 System Programming Use Advanced Dial Plan The Use Advanced Dial Plan field selects if the Advanced Dial Plan described in Advanced Dial Plan in Section 3 should be used when making radio initiated PSTN or PABX calls Call Limit and Aloha Frame Schedule Table This pop up window contains the time of day schedule which allows system priority Aloha Frame length speech call limits and PSTN call limits to be set for specified times of the day see Figure 6 3 Up to eight time ranges can be specified by entering the Start and Stop hours plus an effectivity The EFFectivity field specifies if the times entered apply to weekdays weekends or bo
281. tatistics Figure 5 13 Status Info COMM STATISTICS retrieves statistics information from all Model 827s at the selected site The retrieved statistical information is stored in a file named S HMMDD INF where site number MM Month and DD Day For the format of the stored statistics information refer to Appendix B Repeater levels Use the Repeater levels option to adjust all the necessary audio levels for the repeater interface in the Model 827s For more information about setting repeater levels please refer to Tests and Adjustments Radio in Section 4 Figure 5 14 shows a sample screen for setting repeater levels 5 23 Section 5 Getting Started COMM REPEATER LEVELS SUPERVISOR mode Repeater Level Monitor Site 001 RP 4 STATUS TY HYBRID BALANCE AND LEVEL SETTINGS ADJ COMPLETED 01 Line 05 TYPE TRAFFIC STAT BUSY 02 03 IDLE TRA Select from highlighted 04 B Balance K FFSK Out Gain 05 BUSY TRA T Audio To Ph R Repeat Audio 06 F Audio Frm Ph C COR Threshold 07 IDLE TRA V Vox Thres OD MES reyel 08 D Vox Decay H Hangup 09 BUSY CNT U E amp MAW Microwv S Silence Setup 10 I Radio In Gain ESC to quit 11 O Radio Out Gain 12 Choice HELP FILE enter ESC to exit Figure 5 14 Repeater Levels Telco Balance Levels Use the Telco Ba
282. telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate CANADIAN EMC COMPLIANCE NOTICE This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Re
283. tgoing call is routed as quickly and efficiently as possible to the appropriate site Operation From any one site a radio unit or telephone line can call a unit that is registered at any one of the other sites in the network Likewise a group call can originate from a single user or telephone line and will fan out to include up to 6 sites in a call 3 19 Section 3 Operation Individual Calls In the most simplified case individual calls are placed at the primary site to a unit also at that site Once a user has registered and the primary site information is recorded at the home site this operation is identical to single site operation Calls become more complex when the caller or the calling party move to different sites After obtaining primary and optional secondary site information from the home site the Model 827 uses network information to route the call At each site a network information table tells that site what trunk group to use to connect to each site listed in the table The network information table can contain information for up to 32 sites The specified trunk group may connect directly to the destination or simply move the call one site closer to the destination Telephone interfaces are designated as direct intersite links and assigned to a trunk group as part of the Telco Port programming Figure 3 4 is a diagram of a four site system along with Networking Figure 3 5 and Telco Port programming Figure 3 6 thro
284. th The default values entered in the fields on the top of the window are used for all time periods not entered in the schedule table E SITE CONFIG SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITE CONFIG te Site Name Country Site Number 001 1 LOCAL SITE UK Site Name LOCAL SITE Programming Access O Comm Port 1 Set M827 time from PC time Y Modem access number 0000088 Can Control channel become Traffic Y SCHEDULE Priority Aloha Number amp Call Limits Defaults Priority 0 Speech Call Limit 03 00 Aloha Num 04 PSTN Call Limit 05 00 ELP Daily Per Hour Parameters Hh ter the default priority level Start Stop Prior Aloha Spch PSTN E for Low 1 for Med Lo 0 04 03 00 05 2 for Med hi 3 for High 04 03 00 05 04 03 0 04 03 0 0 0 0 0 04 03 04 03 04 03 NNN DN Fh 26 4 C52 X2 XOLG TCR gt C5 265 Figure 6 3 Site Configuration Schedule Prior Column The Prior column sets the system priority for the programmed time interval Any unit or group with a priority less than the current system priority will not be allowed access to the system and will receive a system busy indication Aloha Column The Aloha column sets the value for parameter N of the ALH message A Model 827 acting as a control channel sends an ALH message to invite r
285. the processing software For example if a Num field is specified as 8 2 then the stored number might be 08991234 which corresponds to an actual number of 89912 34 Also note that Char fields are left justified Table A 6 shows the field contents and format for the HEADER Record in the User File Table A 6 User File Header Fields Field Name Type Length Description U User file Num of Records Total number of records in this file Processed Flag Char Field used by billing software to indicate the file has been processed CRLF Carriage Return Line Feed Table A 7 shows the field contents and format for FLEET Records in the User File A 7 Appendix A Call Detail Files Table A 7 User File Fields for Fleet Record Field Name Type Length Description Fleet Index Assigned fleet index number Home Site Fleet Status Char Y Fleet is valid N Not valid Number Prefix Number prefix assigned to this fleet 200 327 Fleet Group Starting number for the block of group idents assigned Number to this fleet 2001 6050 Last Group Num 3 Last group number that is available for groups in this Number fleet Range is 90 99 or 900 998 Fleet Individual Num 4 Starting number for the block of individual idents Number assigned to this fleet 2001 6050 Last Individual Num 3 Last individual number that is available for individuals in Number this fleet Range is 20 89 or 200 899 Account This customer s account number
286. then X BUSY will be displayed in the STATUS column RX JAMMED will be displayed in the STATUS column if a repeater is receiving some type of interference For each repeater currently in use the calling prefix and ident the called prefix and ident as well as the elapsed time since the call started will be displayed If a channel is being used for an outgoing interconnect call the telephone line used in the call will be displayed in the CALLED UNIT column on the monitor screen If the a channel is being used for an incoming interconnect call the telephone line used in the call will be displayed in the CALLING UNIT column on the monitor screen 5 20 Section 5 Getting Started Emergency calls are displayed in red reverse video while multi site calls are displayed in white high intensity Figure 5 11 shows a sample of the Channel Monitor option COMM CHANNEL MONITOR Model 827 Monitor Site 001 CHAN CALLING CALLED TIME 01 CONTROL 03 Line 01 000 0008 00063 05 100 0005 000 0004 00029 07 IDLE Hit ESC to quit CHAN 24 Jan 2000 CALLING Figure 5 11 Channel Monitor Telco Monitor SUPERVISOR mode CALLED 12 57 08 TIME The Telco Monitor option is similar to the Channel Monitor option except that the current status of the telephone interface for each Model 827 at a particular site 1s displayed If a telephone interface is currently involved in an interconnect call then the pr
287. tion either by random access or demanded by the system B 1 Appendix B Statistics Files 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 29 26 2 28 29 Successful Status Calls Number of status transactions successfully completed Status Call Attempts Number of unit to unit status transactions attempted Successful SDM2 Calls Number of SDM2 transactions successfully completed SDM2 Call Attempts Number of unit to unit SDM2 transactions attempted Successful Simple Call Setups Number of Simple calls that were assigned to a traffic channel Simple Call Attempts Number of simple calls attempted unit to unit unit to group and interconnect calls Successful Emergency Call Setups Number of Emergency calls that were assigned to a traffic channel Emergency Call Attempts Number of emergency calls attempted unit to unit unit to group and interconnect calls Calls Queued for Resources for More Than 10 Seconds Number of calls that remained in a call resource queue for more than 10 seconds Calls Queued for Resources for More Than 30 Seconds Number of calls that remained in a call resource queue for more than 30 seconds Calls Queued for Resources for More Than 60 Seconds Number of calls that remained in a call resource queue for more than 60 seconds Calls Canceled by Originating Party Number of calls canceled by the originating unit while the call was being setup
288. to 32 Model 827 sites may be linked together via the telephone interfaces to provide multi site service The integral switch architecture of a Model 827 site allows traffic on any channel to be routed to and from the intersite telephone interfaces at a site In addition to voice FFSK data is transmitted over the intersite links to handle registration and call set up transactions In situations where all intersite links connected to a site are frequently occupied with speech traffic or the system owner requires faster call setup a dedicated high speed data link between sites is supported for transmitting registration and call set up data FRONT AND BACK PANEL INDICATORS AND CONNECTIONS The indicators and connections on both the front and back panels of the Model 827 are shown in Figure 3 2 The Model 827 has six individual front panel LEDs as well as a block LED with ten elements The front panel also contains two 8 position DIP switches which are accessible by removing the small metal plate screwed to the front panel refer to Figure 4 4 in Section 4 for a description an RS 232 connector and a power on off switch The LEDs provide feedback to the system operator on the current status of each Model 827 Each LED s function is described below Individual LEDs Telco Lights when unit s telephone interface is offhook Repeater Lights when the unit s repeater interface is busy PTT Lights when the Model 827 has activated the tra
289. to drive A 5 Type INSTALL lt ENTER gt 6 When INSTALL prompts for a directory name enter the name of the directory where the old M827BASE is installed 7 Follow the on screen instructions 8 After the installation is complete run the program by typing M827BASE lt ENTER gt to verify that the data was converted successfully before deleting the bak bef and aud files created during the INSTALL process The bak are backups of the old dat files and bef are backups of the old def files The aud files contain information regarding the conversion from one database version to another Separate Billing File Directory Billing files for Call Detail Records will be stored in the M827BASE directory unless a separate directory named M827BILL is created M827BASE will first look for a M827BILL directory in the root directory and put the billing files there If that directory has not been set up it will put the billing files in the M827BASE directory To create a separate M827BILL directory follow these steps 1 At the DOS prompt go to the root directory cd lt ENTER gt 2 Create a new directory by typing mkdir m827bilIXENTER gt 5 2 Section 5 Getting Started COMMUNICATION LINK TO MODEL 827 To program a Model 827 site from M827BASE you must be able to establish a communication link to one of the Model 827s at particular site It is only necessary to communicate with one Model 827 as
290. to erase the entire command field Note blank Command fields in the middle of the Command Program are not accepted when attempting to exit and save the program Parameters The Parameters field see Figure 6 36 Note 4 is not used by all commands refer to the specific commands above for more details No variable digits are entered here only exact digits All variable digits encountered while processing dialed digits are programmed in the 6 62 Section 6 System Programming Digit Plan field of the SITE DIAL PLAN menu which is discussed in Dial Plan on page 6 64 Least Cost Route Table The Least Cost Route Tables define which trunk groups are used in which order for a particular number dialed Up to 32 Least Cost Routes can be defined for each Model 827 site These Routes allow the owner of the system to define which trunks to use for a call to provide the most cost effective use of the available resources The dialing plans indicate which Least Cost Route to use for a call Figure 6 37 shows a screen for programming a Least Cost Route in M827BASE Each Least Cost Route may include up to eight trunk groups The trunk groups are listed in the order in which they are searched when looking for an available trunk to place an outgoing call the desired Trunk Group No then press 41 Press for pop up Use T keys to select the desired Outdial Program then press 1 EAST COST ROUTE S
291. ts using the system are in general required to register once a day A unit receiving a call from another mobile or from the PSTN or PABX is also checked for registration If the called mobile is not registered registration will be demanded and must be successful for the call to be completed Traffic Channel Allocation Once a radio unit has requested access to the system or an incoming call has been received on one of the telephone ports the control channel has the responsibility of allocating a traffic channel for the call To determine if a traffic channel is available to be assigned the control channel begins checking the state of all channels in the system The channel at which it begins checking is determined by the Traffic Channel Selection parameter under the Traffic Parameters window in the MPT1327 Configuration This parameter selects among the following choices F First Lowest available channel R Rotary select the first channel 3 5 Section 3 Operation available starting at the next highest channel after the last one allocated or L Least used of the available A traffic channel is determined to be available if it is idle and is not in either a jammed or disabled state If all traffic channels in the system are busy the call will be queued if queuing is enabled and the traffic queue is not full If the queue is full or there is no queuing and the control channel is allowed to become traffic it will be allocated for the call
292. ugh Figure 3 10 for site 1 CITY 4 Serial Unit 16 PSTN CITY 2 PSTN PSTN Figure 3 4 Sample of Model 827 System Configuration 3 20 Section 3 Operation SITE NETWORK INDEX Stt SR TG 002 02 003 03 HELP Edit press ENTER RETURN lt Guide Window F1 Done Esc SUPERVISOR mode SITEOO1 Connected Site 002 Serial Port 4 01 Baud Rate 9600 Trunk Group 01 Queue Size 2 Create Date 03 22 00 Alter Date 04 20 00 Figure 3 5 Network Programming for Site 1 Connected Site 2 SITE NETWORK INDEX Stt SR TG 002 02 003 03 HELP Edit press ENTER RETURN Guide Window Done Esc SUPERVISOR mode SITEOO1 Connected Site 003 Serial Port Baud Rate 2400 Trunk Group 02 Queue Size 2 Create Date 03 22 00 Alter Date 04 20 00 je M eee Figure 3 6 Telco Programming for Site 1 Connected Site 3 3 21 Section 3 Operation SITE NETWORK SUPERVISOR mode INDEX SITEOO1 St SR TG Connected Site 004 002 02 Serial Port 4 04 003 03 Baud Rate 9600 Trunk Group 03 Queue Size Create Date 03 22 00 Alter Date 04 20 00 Edit press ENTER RETURN Guide Window F1 Done Esc Figure 3 7 Telco Programming for Site 1 Connected Site 4 SITE TELCO P
293. umber computed from the feed digits and the adder assigned to that range of feed digits for the Model 827 receiving the call Please refer to SITE TELCO PORTS shown in Figure 6 21 on page 6 37 Note You must use a DTMF telephone to access voice prompt programming The process of cloning voice prompts from one Model 827 to another is a very data intensive operation All data intensive operations are mutually exclusive at the Model 827 site Data intensive operations include M827BASE communication sessions database cloning and 6 71 Section 6 System Programming voice prompt recording cloning This means that when a M827BASE communication session or cloning is in progress and you try to access voice prompt recording you will hear a busy signal and be disconnected When gaining access to voice prompt recording the following tone prompts will be heard e A short burst of dial tone indicating that a security code must be entered to gain access to voice prompt recording System busy voice prompt or congestion tone if other data intensive activity is in progress e Two ding dongs indicating that the Model 827 is ready to receive voice prompt commands Voice Programming Commands Once you have gained access to the voice prompt recording process i e you ve heard two ding dongs you will hear four short high pitched beeps indicating it is ready for a commands to be entered At this point you have three commands available to
294. uminating the ALARM LED The BUS LED will be lit if the unit is successfully cabled together with other MODEL 827s on the PCM bus The LED is lit only when frame sync is detected on the PCM bus In addition the PCM Bus Master blinks this LED twice per second while the slave MODEL 827s hold this LED on continuously 4 28 Section 4 Installation INSTALLING NEW EPROMs l 10 11 Most changes to the Model 827 are made only to the database software which can be accomplished over a modem However if a change is made to the Control Software on 702 9746 Processor board new EPROMs containing the operating software for the unit must be installed ICs are delicate and sensitive to static When handling them be sure to remain grounded by maintaining contact with the chassis sheet metal Only remove the ICs from the static protective shipping material when ready for installation The following steps outline the EPROM installation procedure Remove all cabling and power from the back of the Model 827 Trunking Controller 901 9424 Remove the top cover Carefully note the orientation of the existing EPROMs located in U21 and 022 on the 702 9746 Model 827 Processor board as determined by the small notches at one end of the parts and not by the Zetron labels Refer to Figure 4 6 Remove the old EPROMs U21 and U22 from 702 9746 Processor board Refer to Figure 4 6 Install the new ICs in the designated sockets with the orientati
295. untry UK UK USA Pulse On Time 035 Off Time 065 Interdigit Time 800 DTMF On Time 080 Off Time 080 Regenerated DTMF Level 12 Wink CADENCE TBL Win 1 2 3 Win Ringing Tone On 0400 0400 MF M Tone Off 0200 2000 HELP Edit Busy Enter the tone on time in milliseconds Tone On 0350 0350 0350 200 9950 or blank Dial Tone Off 0350 0350 0350 Digi Reorder Type I Tone On 0400 0200 0400 Comm Tone Off 0350 0500 0350 Reorder Type II Tone On Tone Off Figure 6 13 Country Data Cadence Table Ringing The Ringing entry is used to count how many complete ringing cycles have occurred before the Model 827 answers an incoming call on an End to End telephone line The number of Rings Until Answer is programmable in the End to End pop up window under Telco ports see End to End on page 6 33 Busy and Reorder Types The rest of the entries in this table are used in conjunction with the Disconnect on Call Progress tone field in the Site Configuration Call Parameters window Refer to Figure 6 2 on page 6 5 for details If the Model 827 is programmed to disconnect on detecting a call progress tone then when three consecutive ON OFF cycles are detected and a match is found in the Cadence Table and the cadence tone persists for 3 seconds the Model 827 will disconnect the call For example this would cause the Model 827 to disconnect a call if a mobile unit called a busy number Dial Click Detect Gain The Dial Cl
296. ure 5 21 Password Access Levels Section 5 Getting Started Assigning Passwords From the Main Menu bar press Shift F9 to get the Password Entry screen and follow the on screen instructions to assign passwords After passwords have been assigned only users with the password for level 4 will have access to all four passwords Users with the password for level 1 2 or3 will only have access to the password for that specific level When entering passwords the following requirements must be met e Passwords must be 1 to 8 ASCII characters long They are case sensitive and any bad character will be filtered out upon entry e No spaces allowed Spaces will be filtered out upon entry e Passwords may NOT begin with the four letters HELP in any combination of upper or lower case Asingle asterisk allows full access or no password necessary As a password is entered it will be displayed on the screen exactly how M827BASE will require it to be entered for future access Caution If you set the level 4 password to a single asterisk and assign passwords to the other levels when a user enters M827BASE the passwords will be ignored and the user will be granted supervisor access If you want unlimited access to a level enter a single asterisk for the password That level will be accessible to all users that is no password is necessary Certain menu items are accessible from more than one level that is they are s
297. urst are all programmable items A control channel will monitor the SENSE 4 input in the same manner as a traffic channel If the channel is in the cross busy state when the time between bursts expires the burst will be held off until the channel becomes available TRAFFIC CHANNEL OPERATION Once a traffic channel has been allocated to a call the channel will begin transmitting and the radio units will be sent to the allocated channel Speech and Telephone Interconnect Calls For both speech and telephone interconnect calls the allocated traffic channel has the responsibility of detecting activity on the channel setting audio paths as required timing the call clearing unwanted units from the channel and clearing units from the channel at the end of the call Activity on a channel can be programmed to be determined by one or more of the following the reception of MAINT messages MAINT PERIODIC MAINT PRESSEL ON or MAINT PRESSEL OFF by the Model 827 COR activity or VOX activity from the 3 8 Section 3 Operation telephone port in the case of interconnect or multi site calls Both MAINT PRESSEL ON messages from the radio and the presence of the COR signal are used to enable the repeat audio path and the radio to telephone audio when needed The audio path from the telephone port will be permanently enabled during an interconnect call The repeat audio and or radio to telephone path will be disabled on the receipt of a MAINT PRESSEL OFF m
298. ute and just assign the first available telephone line in trunk group zero Trunk group zero is a default trunk group containing all active telephone lines at the site If a telephone line is not assigned to a trunk group it is automatically considered a member of trunk group zero So turning off least cost routing can be done by not assigning trunk groups not assigning a Roam COS to any of the units or not assigning a Dial Plan within the Roam COS 6 57 Section 6 System Programming Advanced Multi site Least Cost Routing Multi site Least Cost Routing is initiated by entering an intersite link trunk group in the Least Cost Route Table When a port in this trunk group is allocated for an outgoing PSTN PABX call the system will apply the specified outdial program to the dialed digits and forward the call request to the site at the other end of the intersite link The subsequent site will take the forwarded dial string out of the intersite PSTN call request and treat the dialed digits as if the calling radio were initiating the call from this site It will use the calling unit s Roaming COS to determine which dialplan to use at this site Then it will compare the dialed string with the dialplan to determine which Least Cost Route Table to use at this site From the Least Cost Route Table a trunk group is determined and an outgoing port is allocated The outdial program for this route will be applied to the dialed digit string received at this
299. utodial number tables selectable by user Alarm detection and reporting Cross busy sense input and control output to allow the sharing of an existing repeater used for conventional radios Supports regional networks of up to 32 sites 2 SPECIFICATIONS fene bas veces 2 1 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 RADIO SPECIFICATIONS sheh 2 1 RADIO INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS eere 2 1 TELEPHONE INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS eee 2 2 End to End io oe pete ee eet eere oes eb 2 2 2 or 4 Wire Private 2 2 INTERSITE EINKING ires 2 3 SYSTEM SITECAPACITY 2 3 ACCOUNTING SPECIFICATIONS 52 2 3 ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATION ttt tco ppc ttr tbe 2 4 2 SPECIFICATIONS PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Power 10 5 to 16 volts DC 12 watts Temperature 0 to 60 Celsius Size 482 6 mm X x 44 5 mm H x 262 6 mm D Weight 3kg RADIO SPECIFICATIONS Conforms to MPT1327 1343 trunking standard Supports radios compliant with MPT1327 1352 Full duplex or half duplex operation RADIO INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS PTT Form C relay closure 1 amp 30 volts max COR External COR CAS polarity select Internal Squelch Tx Audio Adjustable 40 to 3 dBm 1K ohm impedance 1000Hz Rx Audio Adjustable 40 to 3 dB Single or differential input 50K ohm
300. vailable trunk or telephone line to use for the call If no lines are available in the first trunk group listed it looks in the next trunk group in the list until an available line is found or all lines are busy If all lines are busy the call is queued 6 56 Section 6 System Programming Radio Site 1 o Mobile Unit 201 0002 Dials 1256 880 663 Model 827 finds an unused Model 827 compares digits trunk in Trunkgroup 2 which dialed from mobile and selects in turn specifies Outdial Outdial Program 04 dictates to echo 880 then 663 Least Cost Route 02 Proeram 04 to the outbound trunk Figure 6 34 Outgoing Call Diagram When an available line is found the Least Cost Route table tells the Model 827 which OutDial Table to use Now the Model 827 takes the PSTN destination and formats it according to the OutDial Program and sends a message to the Model 827 with the available telephone line to dial the PSTN destination At this point the Model 827 control channel assigns the call to a Model 827 traffic channel The Model 827 with the telephone line and the Model 827 traffic channel then connect audio on the PCM bus and the PSTN call is established Default Trunk Group When the Model 827 is processing an outgoing interconnect call if at any point along the way the next step in this sequence becomes indeterminate the Model 827 will give up trying to least cost ro
301. ve as Control Channel 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 54 00 00 TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATISTICS Time Active w Call 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Idle 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 Time Busy 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 54 00 00 Total Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Clearing Down Calls 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Messages Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 1 Bit Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Bit Pair Errors 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Not Decodable w SYNT 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time RX Jammed 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Time Cross Busied 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TELCO PORT STATISTICS Time Inbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Inbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Outbound 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Num Outbound Calls 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Time Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Disabled Count 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 B 7 Appendix B Statistics Files EET 5 Statistics for Unit 3 k k k k Time of Day 6PM 7PM 8PM 9PM 10PM 11PM CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 XBusy Slots Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Frames Txed 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Withdrawn Slots 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Good Responses 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000
302. ved for use as an extension instrument to compatible PBXs The supplier of the apparatus should be consulted for an up to date list of PBXs with which the apparatus is compatible It cannot be guaranteed that the apparatus will operate correctly under all possible conditions of connection to compatible PBXs Any cases of difficulty should be referred in the first instance to the supplier of the telephone apparatus This apparatus is suitable for connection to a PBX which returns a secondary proceed indication Where the PBX extension wiring is not owned by BT such connections may only be made by the Designated Maintainer of the PBX unless 1 he has agreed in writing that another person may do so 2 he has failed to do so within a period of 14 days of receiving written notice requesting such connection to be made or 3 where the apparatus has not been approved as an entirety with the PBX CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery 1s incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING All ports expect PSTN identified as Telephone on rear panel SELV and should be connect to SELV equipment Contents 1 INTRODUCTION ice Cages ah te einen etus 1 1 FEATURES 1 1 2 SPBCIPICATIONS
303. ver the pre defined values for each country should work fine 6 20 Section 6 System Programming SITE COUNTRY DATA SUPERVISOR mode INDEX COUNTRY FILE Country Comments Country UK UK USA Pulse On Time 035 Off Time 065 Interdigit Time 800 DTMF On Time 080 Off Time 080 Regenerated DTMF Level 12 Wink Parameters Min Wink Time 06 Wink Completion Time 2 00 Wink Duration 24 MF Mode 0 HELP Edit Cadence Table Y Edit press ENTER RETURN lt Dial Click Detect Gain 005 0 Digital Hybrid Enable Y Mode 2 Guide Window Comments Done Esc Figure 6 11 Required Country Data Fields Country The Country field is highlighted because each country name is unique and every Model 827 site must have a country assigned to it Refer to SITE CONFIGURATION on page 6 2 for further details The Country data assigned to each site is bundled with the Site Config database whenever an Update is performed either by updating the Site Config or the entire database Wink Parameters The Wink Parameters are used with E amp M signaling The first two parameters Min Wink Time and Wink Complete Time are used when the Model 827 is initiating an outgoing call and must detect a wink from the PSTN PABX before dialing any digits Minimum Wink Time The first parameter is the minimum amount of time the wink must be present for the Model 827 to qualify it as a valid wink W
304. voltage range 0 to 5V The SENSE 4 input is dedicated to the Cross Busy function See Cross Busy Operation in Section 3 for more information CONTROL OUTPUTS P3 pins 1 4 are output connections They are open collector Darlington transistor pairs to ground They provide a logic signal to ground when active Each output can accept a voltage range of 0 to 10V and can sink 100 mA of current The CONTROL 4 output is dedicated to the Cross Busy function See Cross Busy Operation in Section 3 for more information PTT RELAY The Model 827 provides relay contacts for a two wire PTT loop connection the transmitter requires V to key This provides a set of relay contacts on pins 8 NO NC 9 COM Set on board 702 9745 Model 827 Trunking Controller to position A Normally Open position B Normally Closed for the desired configuration of pin 8 IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY In case of difficulty call Zetron and ask for Model 827 Applications support Please have the serial number of the unit and or the Zetron Order number If the call is made from the installation site by the installer or radio technician often the problem can be solved over the telephone Zetron s European office can be reached at 44 0 1256 880663 voice or 44 0 1256 880491 FAX 4 27 Section 4 Installation MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE NOTES 1 When the unit is reset or powered on an automatic database and voice prompt test will be executed If error
305. when dial click decoding is enabled by selecting one of the four Dial Click Modes One must remember that the dial clicks are only heard in the audio path by the Model 827 The Model 827 is listening to the clicking noises generated by the pulsing of the rotary telephone The Model 827 can employ one of four algorithms for grouping clicks together to decode which pulse digit was dialed Dial Click decoding requires a reasonably good audio connection as any popping noises will sound like a dial click For this reason the Model 827 does not start to decode dial clicks until the Welcome prompt has completely finished playing If a voice prompt is recorded for the Welcome prompt the prompt must be clipped off as soon as the prompt is finished being recorded Refer to Ending a Recording on page 6 72 for details If the voice prompt is playing background noise because the recording was not clipped off the user will start dialing before the Model 827 has started decoding dial clicks Thus causing the rotary overdial digits to be incorrectly decoded Selecting the Dial Click Mode is a matter of testing and seeing which mode works the most reliably at each installation Two of the modes require some pulse digits to be overdialed to calibrate the dial click decoder before the mobile unit s access digits are overdialed There is also Dial Click Detect Gain shown in Figure 6 11 on page 6 21 which can be adjusted to maximize dial click dec
306. you 0 Erase T2 Play 9 Each command must be preceded with DTMF After one of these commands has been received you will hear two quick lower pitched beeps These two lower pitched beeps indicate that the command is valid and now the process is ready for a prompt number The prompt number is always two digits so prompts 1 through 9 must be preceded with a 0 This means that the DTMF sequence 203 will play voice prompt three There is one more command that will exit the voice prompt recording process THE Exit voice prompt recording If you are in voice prompt recording process and you do not enter a DTMF key the process will time out and exit just as if you entered P Ending a Recording Once you have entered and you have finished speaking the voice prompt you recording it is important to end the recording process with a DTMF digit any DTMF digit will do It is important that the recorded prompt is ended cleanly with a stop digit otherwise the recording process will continue until the maximum allotted time for that prompt expires For instance you may have a prompt with 5 seconds allocated and you only record a prompt lasting 3 seconds If the prompt is not clipped off after 3 seconds it will continue recording background noise for the remaining 2 seconds This can be annoying to the listener because the next action may not take place until the total 5 seconds of voice prompt has been pl
307. ype M U Unit Record Index of the fleet this unit is a member of Unit Number Unit number assigned to this individual Falls within the range specified by the fleet Prefix Prefix calculated from the fleet number 200 Ident Ident calculated from the fleet individual number and the unit number Status Char 1 Y Unit is valid N Unit is not valid Comments Any comments which apply to this unit Manufacturer s Num 3 Manufacturer s code portion of this unit s ESN number Code 0 255 Model number portion of this units ESN number 0 15 Serial Number Serial number portion of this units ESN number 1 262143 Create Date to Date this record was created MM DD YY Alter Date Char Date this record was last altered MM DD YY CRLF om Carriage Return Line Feed A 10 Appendix A Call Detail Files Appendix B STATISTICS FILES CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATIS SAMPLE STATISTICS FILE Unit Hourly Statistics Sample System Loading Sample TICS TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT STATISTICS Appendix B STATISTICS FILES The Model 827 records statistics on many aspects of system operation Statistics are tabulated on an hourly basis At midnight the current day s statistics counters are rolled over to yesterday s statistics counters and the current day s statistics are cleared for the new day CONTROL CHANNEL STATISTICS When operating as a control channel the Model 827 records the following hourly

ZETRON Model 827 MPT1327 Trunking Controller - F1DFF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents